Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutContract 2011 2372 Contract# ;2372 ` EJCDC STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF STIPULATED PRICE THIS AGREEMENT is by and between the CITY OF COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MINNESOTA (OWNER) and 1::i DS :Builders, Inc. (CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 - WORK 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: ARTICLE 2 - THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: ® Office Remodeling and Security improvements of Columbia Heights City Hall at 590 40 Ave NE, Columbia lleights. IVI:N 55421 ARTICLE 3 - ENGINEER 3.01 The Project has been designed by the CITY OF COLUMBIA HEIGHTS' ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (ENGINEER), who is to act as OWNER's representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time of the Essence A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 4.02 Dates for Substantial Completion and Final Payment A. The Work will be substantially completed on or before July 15, 2011, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the 22 Contract# General Conditions on or before August 15, 2011. 4.03 Liquidated Damages A. CONTRACTOR and OWNER recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $250.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $250.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 above for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. In addition, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $250.00 for each day that expires after the following milestones: ♦ August 15, 2011 ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to paragraphs below: For all Work, at the prices stated in CONTRACTOR's Bid, attached hereto as Exhibit A. As provided in Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions, estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and classifications are to be made by ENGINEER as provided in Paragraph 9.07 of the General Conditions. Unit prices have been computed as provided in Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions. 23 Contract# ARTICLE 6 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage A. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment on or about the fifteenth day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraphs 6.02.A.1 and 6.02.A.2 below. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A of the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER may determine or OWNER may withhold including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions: a. 95% of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has been 50% completed as determined by ENGINEER, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER, on recommendation of ENGINEER, may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage; and b. 95% of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage). 2. Upon Substantial Completion, OWNER shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 98% of the Work completed, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine in accordance with Paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the General Conditions and less 5% of ENGINEER' s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to the certificate of Substantial Completion. 6.03 Final Payment A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with 24 Contract# Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 7 - INTEREST 7.01 All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall bear interest at the rate stipulated in Minnesota Statute 161.322. ARTICLE 8 — CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 8.01 In order to induce OWNER to enter this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: A. CONTRACTOR has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. CONTRACTOR has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. CONTRACTOR is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. •. •. •� - - - conditions in or relating to existing surface -o .: . - . . - . _ . . Supplcrnenta : • • : - . • : - : • ' .. :raph '1.02 of the General Conditions 1 4 1- -- -- E. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. F. CONTRACTOR does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 25 Contract# G. CONTRACTOR is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. H. CONTRACTOR has correlated the infon known to CONTRACTOR, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. ambiguities, or discrepancies that CONTRACTOR has discovered in the Contract CONTRACT J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 26 Contract# ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. This Agreement (pages 14 to 22 , inclusive). 2. Performance Bond (pages N/A to , inclusive). 3. Payment Bond (pages N/A to _ , inclusive). 4. Other Bonds (pages N/A to , inclusive). 5. General Conditions (pages 01 to 49 , inclusive). 6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 50 to 58, inclusive). 7. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual (pages 23 to 180, inclusive) 8. Drawings consisting of sheets 1 -11 and Revised 4 &5 dated 4/15/11 9. Addenda (numbers 1 , 2, 3 , inclusive). 10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a. CONTRACTOR's Bid (pages 7 _ to 1 inclusive). b. Documentation submitted by CONTRACTOR prior to Notice of Award (pages 7 _ to 13 , inclusive). Alternate 2- Sheetrock: Deduct $1,000. Continue sheetrock around corner and terminate at post. This would alleviate the need to infill block. 11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: a. Notice to Proceed (pages 1 to 1 , inclusive). b. Work Change Directives. c. Change Order(s). B. The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9. 27 Contract# D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10 - MISCELLANEOUS 10.01 Terms A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. 10.02 Assignment of Contract A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 10.03 Successors and Assigns A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 10.04 Severability A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. 10.05 Other Provisions (if applicable). A. Withholding Affidavit for Contractors. A Withholding Affidavit for Contractors must be turned in to the State of Minnesota by the contractor and copied to the City. Approval of the affidavit must be approved by the Minnesota Department of Revenue before any final payment can be made to the contractor. 28 Contract# IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or on their behalf. This Agreement will be effective on April 11, 2011 (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement). OWNER: CONTRACTOR: A 6/ . ACF(y r Fehst, gr g er By: EDS Builders Inc. -OOP Gary Pete .on, ayor Title: - [CORPORATE SEAL] [CORPORATE SEAL] Attest: ,/ .L . _ A _ _...MLA, Attest: Title: ���� Cy Title: A ddres s"'for. giving notices: Address for giving notices: II p,, ^^ 590 40` Ave(ME 1 4, C ((Jj(� 6 ! \ O 2 ) Columbia Heights MN 55421 L,at/h EMS S D , (If OWNER is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If OWNER is a public License No. body, attach evidence of authority to sign and (Where applicable) resolution or other documents authorizing execution of OWNER - CONTRACTOR Agent for service of process: Agreement). (If CONTRACTOR is a corporation or a partnership, attach evidence of authority to sign.) Designated Representative: Designated Representative: Name: Walt Fehst Name: W(I SrY11ty Title: City Manager Title: + Address: 590 40` Ave Ne Address: q(� q, �q,; -� 0j l� J� at l i 1�oV Columbia Heights MN 55421 L.-Mt -U itA■ 660 - Phone: 763 - 706 -3608 Phone: (051- 43( -24 2(p E -mail: wait. fehst @ci.columbia- heights.mn.us E -mail: CIU, (0) 29 EDS Builders, Inc. 404A Saint Croix Trail North Lakeland, MN 55043 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS OFFICE REMODELING & SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS 590 40TH AVENUE NE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN 55421 April 29, 2011 SCHEDULE 5/2/11 5/9/11 5/16/11 5/23/11 5/31/11 6/6/2011 6/13/2011 6/20/2011 6/27/2011 7/5/2011 7/11/2011 Sign contract Electrical demo Office demo'„ Install concrete pad Install HVAC Begin pulling electric /security wires Frame floor- new office area ",1, Begin sheetrocking walls VAIPTE s Install hollow metal frames Tape and sand prepared walls :'' a - . Finish prepared walls Paint & Stain Install electrified hardware;��'' ".x Install bullet proof glass Install! suspended ceiling ;h. Finish electrical _ "r Security company to be on -site , Cleanup & punchlist AN i ^" Occupancy EDS BUILDERS, INC. SHOP DRAWINGS - SAMPLE - WARRANTY LOG COLUMBIA HEIGHTS OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS 4/28/2011 Received Received From Sub Sent to from Returned to - 0 - 1736 - SELECTIVE SPEC SECTION SECTION DESCRIPTION Contractor Engineer Engineer Sub Status DEMOLITION - — - — — — - .. -. -- _ _ _ Submittal 01736 Permits and notices authorizing selective demo _ Submittal 01736 Certificates of severance of utilities services _ Submittal 01736 Permits for transport and disposal of debris Submittal 01736 Demolition procedures and operational sequence _ Project Record 01736 Pre - demolition Photographs 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Submittal 03300 Product Data - AS SPECED Submittal 03300 i Concrete Mix Design - AS SPECED _ _ Submittal 03300 Material Test Reports - AS SPECED 04060 MORTAR _ Submittal 04060 Reports - Design Mix - OUT 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL Submittal 05100 Shop Drawings - Fabrication and Erection Drawings - NA Submittal 05100 Current copy of Fabricators Approval and Acceptance - NA 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING _ Submittal 05400 Product Data - AS SPECED _ Submittal 05400 Shop Drawings - detailed drawings & material lists - AS SPECED 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS Submittal 05500 Shop Drawings _ _ 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Submittal 06100 Shop Drawings- Fabrication & installation - OUT Submittal 06100 Quality Assurance - Wood Treatment Certified test reports - OUT Submittal 06100 - National Evaluation Report & code's Evaluation Services Report - OUT _ 07270 FIRESTOPPING _ Submittal 07270 _ Manufacturer's Data - AS SPECED Submittal 07270 _ Shop Drawings - Installation Details - AS SPECED Submittal 07270 _ Applicators Qualifications Statement - AS SPECED _ Submittal 07270 Suppliers Qualifications Statement - AS SPECED _ Warranty 07270 Firestopping used meets requirements specified - AS SPECED 08110 HOLLOW METAL WORK _ - Submittal 08110 Shop Drawings - door types, details, hardware, etc. 08210 WOOD DOORS _ Submittal 08210 Shop Drawings Submittal 08210 Samples - comer sections of doors - OUT Submittal 08210 _Samples - Veneer Samples - OUT Submittal 08210 Frames for light openings - OUT Warranty 08210 _ Lifetime Warranty for Interior Wood Doors 08215 BULLET RESISTANCE DOORS _ . Submittal 08215 Verification of UL listing of bullet resistant composite Submittal 08215 Catalog, shop drawings, specs, frame profiles, etc Warranty 08215 One year warranty all materials and workmanship _ 08820 BULLET RESISTANT HOLLOW META L FIXED WINDOW _ Submittal 08820 Verification of UL listing of bullet resistant composite _ Submittal 08820 _Catalog, shop drawings, specs, frame profiles, etc Warranty 08820 One year on materials and workmanship 08710 DOOR HARDWARE _ Submittal 08710 Detailed Hardware Schedule Submittal 08710 - Documentation for all hardware to be furnished on labeled fire doors Submittal 08710 _ Manufacturer's Catalog data for each item _ _ Submittal 08710 _ Sample of each type of hardware - OUT Submittal 08710 Lead times of all hardware Warranty 08710 Warranty against defects in material & workmanship _ 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS _ _ Submittal 09510 Shop Drawings - Installation layouts, etc. - AS SPECED Submittal 09510 Ceiling suspension members -AS SPECED 1 Submittal 09510 _ Method of attacvhing hangars to building structure -AS SPECED Submittal 09510 _ Ceiling mounted items - AS SPECED Submittal 09510 Samples - AS SPECED 09680 CARPETING _ _ _ Submittal 09680 Name of proposed carpet installer _ Submittal 09680 Independent Testing Lab report on flame spread rating _ Submittal 09680 'Samples 18" x 18" - NEED COLOR SELECTION FROM OWNEF - 09900 PAINTING _ Submittal _ 09900 Painting Systems Submittal 09900 _ Colors - NEED COLOR SELECTION FROM OWNER Submittal 09900 Curent Material Safety Data Sheets _ 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Submittal _ 16050 Material List & Shop Drawings - Raceways and Fittings - AS SPECED Submittal 16050 Material List & Shop Drawings - Outlet Boxes and Pull /Junction Boxes - AS SPECED Submittal 16050 _ Material List & Shop Drawings- Wireways - AS SPECED 1 Submittal 16050 Material List & Shop Drawings- Building Wire and Cable - AS SPECED _ Submittal 16050 'Material List & Shop Drawings - Splices, Taps, and Terminations - AS SPECED Page 1 of 2 EDS BUILDERS, INC. SHOP DRAWINGS - SAMPLE - WARRANTY LOG COLUMBIA HEIGHTS OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS 4/28/2011 Received Received From Sub Sent to from Returned to SPEC SECTION SECTION DESCRIPTION Contractor Engineer Engineer Sub Status Submittal 16050- Material List & Shop Drawings - Wiring.Devices - AS SP_ECED_ Submittal 16050 Material List & Shop Drawings- SafetySwitches - AS SPECED Submittal 16050 Material List & Shop Drawings - Identification - AS SPECED 16500 LIGHTING Submittal 16500 Shop Drawings & descriptive data - AS SPECED Submittal 16500 Shop Drawings for Each ballast type - AS SPECED Page 2 of 2 May 2, 2011 Addendum Number Three Project title and location: Office Remodeling and Security Improvements for 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights MN 55421 Engineer: City of Columbia Heights 637 38 Avenue NE Columbia Heights MN 55421 Bid Time: 9:OOAM Bid Date: March 28, 2011 Bid Place: 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN 55421 City Council Chambers Scope of Addendum: Article 2 — Preliminary Matters 2.01 A. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. Article 4— Available Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions; Reference Points 4.01 Availability of Lands A. B. C. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. B. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. B.C. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. 4.05 Reference Points A. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. Article 5 — Bonds and Insurance 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. B.C. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. Article 6 — Contractor's Responsibilities 6.02 Labor; Working hours. B. Shall read: Except otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will be allowed to work Saturdays. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment. A. Shall read: Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction, equipment, and machinery, tools, appliances, fuels, and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start -up and completion of the Work. Contractor is allowed to use City Services and is responsible for cleanliness of sanitary facilities. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or- Equals" E. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A.B.C. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. Article 8 — Owner's Responsibilities 8.05 Lands and Easement; Reports and Tests. A. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. Article 10 — Changes in the Work; Claims 10.04 Notification to Surety A. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. Article 11— Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work. 11.01 Cost of the Work g. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. 11.02 Allowances A.B.C.D. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. 11.03 Unit Price Work A.B.C.D. shall be removed and disregarded from contract. Contractor's Business Nana: / /iS if t4/ / fi f _ ( , Address: 4/rMi /4> POI - l�Gt�� N�►' �� t/( )v4) C5 Phone No: (7I /�G�� - ./4& Fax No: G t2G� 29/8 B It FORM PROJECT in ENTIFICATION: OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS FOR 5900��4//��0th�Aj AVENUE NE, COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MEN BIDS TO BE OPENED: 9:00 A.M. -- MONDAY, MARC'S 28, 2011 This bid is submitted to: CITY OF COLUMBIA HEIGHTS 590 40 AVENUE NE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN 55421 1. The undersigned B DER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER on the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price and within the Contract time indicated in this bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Document. 2. BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and Instruction to Bidders. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of Bid opening. BIDDER will sign and submit the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen (15) days after the date of OWNER'S NOTICE OF AWARD. 3. In submitting this bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that: 7 (a) BIDDER has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents and of the following Addenda (receipt of all of which is hereby acknowledged): Date Number I 1 n'inrcii ),0 I I o2 (b) BIDDER has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of Work. (c) *BIDDER has studied carefully all reports and drawings of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.02 & 4.03 of the General Conditions, and accepts the determination set forth in Paragraph S.C. 4.02 & 4.03 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extent of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings upon which BIDDER is entitled to rely. (d) *BIDDER has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in (c) above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work as BIDDER considers necessary for the performance of furnishing the work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other teens and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of Paragraph 4.02 & 4.03 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are or will be required by BIDDER for such purposes. (e) *BIDDER has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing facility. (f) BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, discrepancies that it has discovered in the Contract Doc-innents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER. (g) This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or 8 rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; BIDDER has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other BIDDER to submit a false or sham Bid; B 11' DER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and B inDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other BIDDER or over OWNER. (i) Any other representation as required by Laws and Regulations. ir TOTAL BID 4, i. S - - us e,, S u- 1 Tlivou s <` v,,0,4\e,,tr_ ( .i - , Total Bid Written In Words 9 5. BIDDER ag ees that the Work will be completed as follows: m OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS TO 590 40 AVENUE NE, COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN © *Final inspection by JUNE 15, 2011, in accordance with Paragraph 14.06 of the General Conditions. ® BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the work on time. 6. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of the BID. (a) A tabulation of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations required to be identified in this Bid. (b) The contractor will complete the Work sequence in accordance with Division 1, Section 4, General Requirements. (c) Affidavit of Non - Collusion. 7. Communications concerning this BID shall be addressed to the address of BIDDER indicated below. 8. The terms used in this BID, which are defined in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract included as part of the Contract Documents, have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. SIJB11IITTED ON: 1 , 0 A , 2011. 10 If BIDDER is: AN INDIVIDUAL By (SEAL) (Individual's Name) toing Business As Address: Telephone No: A PARTNERS By (SEAL) (Firm Name) (General Partner) Business Address: Telephone No.: (Continued on next page.) A CORPORATION 11 By FLIS cJ U / / (C , (SEAL(,) (Corporation Name) (State of Incorporation) By CC r/ (Name of Person Authorized to Sign) PO rig) (Title) ATTEST: _Z' L. %��G ecretary) Business Address: 1 /00--/ C l x ' o) )(/ Lo /ancl s04.3 Telephone No. 4a A JOINT VENTURE By (Name) (Address) By (Name) (Address) Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above. STATE OF 12 COUNTY OF V1/.1 Ck 0 014_0 h AFFIDAVIT OF NON - COLLUSION: (1) That I am the BIDDER (if the bidder is an individual), a partner in the BIDDER (if the - bidder is a partnership) -of an officer or .employee of the BIDDER. corporation having authority to sign on its behalf (if the BIDDER is a corporation; (2) That the attached bid or bids have been arrived at by the BIDDER individually and have been submitted without collusion with, and without any agreement, understanding or planned common course of action with any vendor of materials, supplies, equipment or services described in the invitation to bid designed to limit individual bidding or competition; (3) That the contents of the bid or bids have not been communicated by the BIDDER, or its employees or agents, to any person not any employee or agent of the BIDDER, or its surety, on any bond furnished with the bid or bids, and will not be communicated to any person, prior to any official opening of the bids, or bids; and; (4) That I have fully informed myself regarding the accuracy of the statements made in this affidavit. ; I on ,, Q----<__ ‘4," BIDDER E hS /(!I/ rs, _,1( FIRM MAKING BIDS ?!TH Subscribed and sworn to before me ,c - • ti MY ,- j a 3f 201 s) this ° 2, day of 'OW( 1-' , 2O1 . . .1.-,1.l_._„_. -,s_.- ..�l�ts� _,) F .---..\.1,— .i * -:— . -'"'-'. , ,- 2 NAME _ ,__,___Li..' .-_- ?-dir. li P ' ' OFFICIAL TITLE 13 March 18, 2011 Addendum Number Two Project title and location: Office Remodeling and Security Improvements for 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN Engineer: City of Columbia Heights 637 38 Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 Bid Time: 9:00 AM Bid Date: March 28, 2011 Bid Place: 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN 55421 City Council Chambers Scope of Addendum: 1. Gypsum board thickness for office and partition walls shall be 5/8" thick. 2. The size of the equipment slab for the AHU is 5'X6'X6" thick 3. New Exit Light locations: a. New double doorway on second floor, elevator side. b. New double doorway on first floor, stairway side. 4. Quarry Tile and base for patching of relocated Women's Restroom door on second floor shall match existing. 5. Carpet base shall match existing at existing walls. Vinyl base shall be installed at new walls. Color to be selected to match carpet as close as possible. March 14, 2011 Addendum Number One Project title and location: Office Remodeling and Security Improvements for 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN Engineer: City of Columbia Heights 637 38 Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 Bid Time: 9:00 AM Bid Date: March 28, 2011 Bid Place: 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN 55421 City Council Chambers Scope of Addendum: Under the EJCDC Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner And Contractor on the Basis of Stipulated Price page 14 Replace Article 1 Work with the following: 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: Office demolition, remodeling and security improvements Also note that under ARTICLE 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE of the "Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract" no BID BOND, PAYMENT BOND or PERFORMANCE BOND is required for this project. • March 18, 2011 Addendum Number Two Project title and location: Office Remodeling and Security Improvements for 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN Engineer: City of Columbia Heights 637 38 Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 Bid Time: 9 :00 AM Bid Date: March 28, 2011 Bid Place: 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN 55421 City Council Chambers Scope of Addendum: 1. Gypsum board thickness for office and partition walls shall be 5/8" thick. 2. The size of the equipment slab for the AHU is 5'X6'X6" thick 3. New Exit Light locations: a. New double doorway on second floor, elevator side. b. New double doorway on first floor, stairway side. 4. Quarry Tile and base for patching of relocated Women's Restroom door on second floor shall match existing. 5. Carpet base shall match existing at existing walls. Vinyl base shall be installed at new walls. Color to be selected to match carpet as close as possible. March 14, 2011 Addendum Number One Project title and location: Office Remodeling and Security Improvements for 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN Engineer: City of Columbia Heights 637 38 Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 Bid Time: 9:00 AM Bid Date: March 28, 2011 Bid Place: 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN 55421 City Council Chambers Scope of Addendum: Under the EJCDC Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner And Contractor on the Basis of Stipulated Price page 14 Replace Article 1 Work with the following: 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: Office demolition, remodeling and security improvements Also note that under ARTICLE 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE of the "Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract" no BID BOND, PAYMENT BOND or PERFORMANCE BOND is required for this project. A .. ' City of Columbia eights ,,, , ; , - Community Development Department Office Remodeling and Security Improvements For 590 40 Avei itte NE Coll imbia i eig ts, MN March 14, 2011 590 40` Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN 55421 763- 706 -3670 •:• 763 - 706 -3671 (Fax) PROJECT MANUAL AND PROPOSAL FORM FOR: OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMTENTS AT 590 40 AVENUE NE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN 55421 I hereby certify that this specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and I am a duly Licensed Eng'neer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. evil R. TS P.E. ense No. 21426 March 14, 2011 TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGE CERTIFICATION PAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Advertisement for Bids 1 Instructions to Bidders 2 -6 Bid Form 7 -12 Affidavit of Non - Collusion 13 CONTRACT FORMS EJCDC — Contract Agreement 14 -22 State of Minnesota IC -134 Form CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT General Conditions (Separate numbering) 00700 -01 — 00700 -49 Supplementary Conditions (Separate Numbering) 00700 -50 — 00700 -58 SPECIFICATIONS Division 1 General Requirements Section 01300 Submittals 23 -27 Section 01400 Quality Control Testing 28 -30 Section 01500 Temporary Facilities 31 -35 Section 01600 Product Requirements 36 -39 Section 01700 Contract Closeout 40 -43 Section 01710 Cleanup 44 -45 Section 01720 Project Record Documents 46 -48 Section 01736 Selective Demolition 49 -54 Division 3 Concrete Construction Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 55 -65 Division 4 Masonry Construction Section 04060 Mortar 66 -67 Section 04090 Masonry Accessories 68 -69 Section 04220 Concrete Unit Masonry 70 -74 Division 5 Metals Section 05100 Structural Steel 75 -78 Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 79 -81 Section 05500 Metal Fabrication 82 -84 Division 6 Carpentry Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 85 -88 CITY OF COLITMBIA HEIGI TS ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 2011 OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS FOR 590 40 AVENUE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN 55421 Notice is hereby given that sealed bids will be received, publicly opened, and read aloud by city staff of Columbia Heights, Anoka County, MN, at City Council Chambers in said City at 9:00 a.m. on Monday, March 28, 2011, for furnishing all work and materials for consideration of City improvements consisting of: Demolition of existing offices, Remodeling of office space, Installation of security doors and windows, Installation of separation walls, Installation of electrical raceways, conductors, devices and data lines. All in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by the City and available at the Community Development Department, 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN 55421, dated March 14, 2011. Plans and specifications incorporating the work for the projects may be examined at the Community Development Department, 590 40 Avenue NE Copies may be purchased from the City of Columbia Heights for the price of $15.00 per set. Plans and specifications, so purchased, become the property of the purchaser, and the City will not refund any portion of the purchase price. A contractors walk through is scheduled on March 17, 2011at 9:00am. Bids must be on the basis of cash payment for the work and materials. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive any informalities therein, and to adjourn the meeting to a later date for the purpose of further consideration of the bids and taking action thereon. No bid may be withdrawn within 60 days from the date of opening of bids. The City Council will consider award of contract at their regular meeting held on Monday, April 11, 2011 at 7:00 p.m. in the Council Chamber at 590 40"' Avenue NE. PUBLISH: (Focus) March 10, 2011 Scott Clark, Community Development Director INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 1. DEFINED TERMS A. Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2007 edition) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits .a bid . directly to the Owner, as distinct from a sub - bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instruction to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 2. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from Engineer. The cost of these Bidding Documents is $15.00 non - refundable per set. B. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. C. Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE A. It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) comply with federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. B. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: C. *Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on other physical conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in Paragraphs 4.02 and 4.03 of the General Conditions. D. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 3, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents, and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and 6 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS furnishing of the Work. 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA A. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response_to_such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than 10 days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. B. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Such Addenda will be binding on all parties as part of the Contract Documents. 6. CONTRACT TIME A. The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially completed and also completed and ready for fmal payment (the Contract Time) are set forth in the Bid Form and the Agreement. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement. 8. SUBSTITUTE OR "OR- EQUAL" ITEMS A. The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or- equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or- equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submissions of any such application by Contractor and considerations by Engineer as set forth in Paragraphs 6.05 A, B, C, D, E, & F of the General Conditions and may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 9. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS A. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. 10. BID FORM A. The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be obtained from Engineer. B. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter. If you do not wish to bid on an item, enter 0.00, do not leave it blank. C. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown 5 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS below the signature. D. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. E. All - names must be typed or printed below -the signature. F. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). G. The address, telephone and fax number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown. H. The Bid Form contains a single proposal form for the complete project. Only a complete bid proposal will be accepted. I. If you are making corrections to the bid: a. Cross out, white out, or erase the alteration completely. b. Print correction in ink. c. The person signing the proposal MUST initial the correction in ink. 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS A. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque, sealed envelope, marked with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by other required documents. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS A. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. B. If, within 24 hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents. 13. OPENING OF BIDS A. Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non - responsive) read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. 14. BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 6 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS A. All bids will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the day of the Bid opening, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid prior to that date. 15. AWARD OF CONTRACT A. Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not involving-price, time -or- changes -in -the Work and -to- negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all non - conforming, non- responsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability, or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by Owner. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. B. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. C. Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Owner may also consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award. D. Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. E. If the contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the project. F. If the contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within 60 days after the day of the Bid opening. G. The City Council will consider award of bids for this project at its regular meeting on April 11, 2011. The City Council reserves the right to reject all bids if it appears, based on bid prices received, it is not in the best interest of the Owner to award this section of the work. The low bid for the work will be the lowest total bid for all sections, including any alternate(s) the city selects, for the total project awarded. 16. CONTRACT SECURITY A. Paragraph 5.1 of the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth Owner's requirements as to Performance and Payment Bonds. When the Successful 5 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the required Performance and Payment Bonds. 17. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT A. When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one (1) fully signed counterpart to Contractor. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification. 6 Contractor's Business Name: Address: Phone No: Fax No: I BID FORM 11 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS FOR 590 40 AVENUE NE, COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN BIDS TO BE OPENED: 9:00 A.M. - MONDAY, MARCH 28, 2011 This bid is submitted to: CITY OF COLUMBIA HEIGHTS 590 40 AVENUE NE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN 55421 1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER on the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price and within the Contract time indicated in this bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Document. 2. BIDDER accepts all of the terns and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and Instruction to Bidders. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of Bid opening. BIDDER will sign and submit the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen (15) days after the date of OWNER'S NOTICE OF AWARD. 3. In submitting this bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that: 7 (a) BIDDER has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents and of the following Addenda (receipt of all of which is hereby acknowledged): Date Number (b) BIDDER has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of Work. (c) *BIDDER has studied carefully all reports and drawings of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.02 & 4.03 of the General Conditions, and accepts the determination set forth in Paragraph S.C. 4.02 & 4.03 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extent of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings upon which BIDDER is entitled to rely. (d) *BIDDER has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in (c) above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work as BIDDER considers necessary for the performance of furnishing the work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of Paragraph 4.02 & 4.03 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are or will be required by BIDDER for such purposes. (e) *BIDDER has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing facility. (f) BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, discrepancies that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER. (g) This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or 8 rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; BIDDER has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other BIDDER to submit a false or sham Bid; BIDDER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other BIDDER or over OWNER. (i) Any other representation as required by Laws and Regulations. TOTAL, BID $ Total Bid Written In Words 9 5. BIDDER agrees that the Work will be completed as follows: • OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS TO 590 40 AVENUE NE, COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN • *Final inspection by JUNE 15, 2011, in accordance with Paragraph 14.06 of the General Conditions. • BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the work on time. 6. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of the BID. (a) A tabulation of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations required to be identified in this Bid. (b) The contractor will complete the Work sequence in accordance with Division 1, Section 4, General Requirements. (c) Affidavit of Non - Collusion. 7. Communications concerning this BID shall be addressed to the address of BIDDER indicated below. 8. The terms used in this BID, which are defined in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract included as part of the Contract Documents, have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. SUBMITTED ON: , 2011. 10 If BIDDER is: AN INDIVIDUAL By (SEAL) (Individual's Name) Doing Business As Address: Telephone No: A PARTNERSHIP By (SEAL) (Firm Name) (General Partner) Business Address: Telephone No.: (Continued on next page.) A CORPORATION 11 By (SEAL) (Corporation Name) (State of Incorporation) By (Name of Person Authorized to Sign) (Title) ATTEST: (Secretary) Business Address: Telephone No. A JOINT VENTURE By (Name) (Address) By (Name) (Address) Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above. STATE OF 12 COUNTY OF AFFIDAVIT OF NON - COLLUSION: (1) That I am the BIDDER (if the bidder is an individual), a partner in the BIDDER (if the bidder is a partnership) of an officer or employee of the BIDDER corporation having authority to sign on its behalf (if the BIDDER is a corporation; (2) That the attached bid or bids have been arrived at by the BIDDER individually and have been submitted without collusion with, and without any agreement, understanding or planned common course of action with any vendor of materials, supplies, equipment or services described in the invitation to bid designed to limit individual bidding or competition; (3) That the contents of the bid or bids have not been communicated by the BIDDER, or its employees or agents, to any person not any employee or agent of the BIDDER, or its surety, on any bond furnished with the bid or bids, and will not be communicated to any person, prior to any official opening of the bids, or bids; and; (4) That I have fully informed myself regarding the accuracy of the statements made in this affidavit. BIDDER FIRM MAKING BIDS Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2011. NAME OFFICIAL TITLE 13 EJCDC STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF STIPULATED PRICE THIS AGREEMENT is by and between the CITY OF COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MINNESOTA (OWNER) and (CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE 1- WORK 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: Concrete curb and gutter, sidewalk, step or flatwork removals and repairs or installations at spot locations throughout the City. ARTICLE 2 - THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: • OFFICE REMODELING AND SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS OF COLUMBIA HEIGHTS CITY HALL AT 590 40 AVENUE NE, COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN 55421 ARTICLE 3 - ENGINEER 3.01 The Project has been designed by the CITY OF COLUMBIA HEIGHTS' ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (ENGINEER), who is to act as OWNER's representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time of the Essence A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 4.02 Dates for Substantial Completion and Final Payment 14 A. The Work will be substantially completed on or before June 15, 2011, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions on or before July 15, 2011. 4.03 Liquidated Damages A. CONTRACTOR and OWNER recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $250.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $250.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 above for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. In addition, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $250.00 for each day that expires after the following milestones: ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to paragraphs below: For all Work, at the prices stated in CONTRACTOR's Bid, attached hereto as Exhibit A. As provided in Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions, estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and classifications are to be made by ENGINEER as provided in Paragraph 9.07 of the General Conditions. Unit prices have been computed as provided in Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 6 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments 15 A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage A. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment on or about the fifteenth day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraphs 6.02.A.1 and 6.02.A.2 below. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A of the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER may determine or OWNER may withhold including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions: a. 95% of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has been 50% completed as determined by ENGINEER, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER, on recommendation of ENGINEER, may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage; and b. 95% of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage). 2. Upon Substantial Completion, OWNER shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 98% of the Work completed, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine in accordance with Paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the General Conditions and less 5% of ENGINEER's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to the certificate of Substantial Completion. 6.03 Final Payment A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 7 - INTEREST 7.01 All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall bear interest at the rate stipulated in Minnesota Statute 161.322. 16 ARTICLE 8 — CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 8.01 In order to induce OWNER to enter this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: A. CONTRACTOR has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. CONTRACTOR has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. CONTRACTOR is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. CONTRACTOR has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site which has been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions. E. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. F. CONTRACTOR does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. G. CONTRACTOR is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. H. CONTRACTOR has correlated the information known to CONTRACTOR, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. 17 I. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that CONTRACTOR has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all teens and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 18 ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT DOCITMENTS 9.01 Contents A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1.This Agreement (pages 14 to 22 , inclusive). 2.Performance Bond (pages N/A to , inclusive). 3.Payrent Bond (pages N/A to , inclusive). 4.Other Bonds (pages N/A to , inclusive). 5.General Conditions (pages 01 to 49 , inclusive). 6.Supplementary Conditions (pages 50 to 58 , inclusive). 7.Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual. 8. Drawings consisting of Sheets 1 -11. 9.Addenda (numbers to , inclusive). 10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a. CONTRACTOR's Bid (pages 7 to 13 inclusive). b. Documentation submitted by CONTRACTOR prior to Notice of Award (pages to , inclusive). c. 11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: a. Notice to Proceed (pages to , inclusive). b. Work Change Directives. c. Change Order(s). B. The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9. D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions. 19 10.01 Terms A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. 10.02 Assignment of Contract A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 10.03 Successors and Assigns A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 10.04 Severability A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. 10.05 Other Provisions (if applicable). 20 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or on their behalf. This Agreement will be effective on , 2010 (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement). OWNER: CONTRACTOR: Walter Fehst, City Manager By: Gary Peterson, Mayor Title: [CORPORATE SEAL] [CORPORATE SEAL] Attest: Attest: Title: Title: Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices: (If OWNER is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If OWNER is a public License No. body, attach evidence of authority to sign and (Where applicable) resolution or other documents authorizing execution of OWNER - CONTRACTOR Agent for service of process: Agreement). 21 (If CONTRACTOR is a corporation or a partnership, attach evidence of authority to sign.) Designated Representative: Designated Representative: Name: Name: Title: Title: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Facsimile: Facsimile: 22 MINNESOTA° REVENUE I C134 thhold ng ,, idav t for Contractors This affidavit must be approved by the Minnesota Department of Revenue before the state of Minnesota or any of its subdivisions can make final payment to contractors. Please type or print clearly. This will be your mailing label for returning the completed form. I Company name Daytime phone Minnesota tax ID number Address Total contract amount Month /year work began 1 City State Zip Code I Amount still due Month /year work ended l I$ Project number Project location , +± ;; C1.i+ Project owner Address City State Zip code ii G1y:0' c-: Did you have employees work on this project? El Yes El No If no who did the work? Check the box that describes your involvement in the project and fill in all information requested. ❑ Sole contractor ❑ Subcontractor Name of contractor who hired you Address ❑ Prime contractor —If you subcontracted out any work on this project, all of your subcontractors must file their own IC134 affidavits and have them certified by the Department of Revenue before you can file your affidavit. For each subcontractor you had fill in the information below and attach a copy of each subcontractor's certified I0134. If you need more space, attach a separate sheet. � Business name Address Owner /Officer R qfMT I declare that all information I have filled in on this form is true and complete to the best of my knowledge and belief. 1 authorize the Department or Rev- enue to disclose pertinent information relating to this project, including sending copies of this form, to the prime contractor if I am a subcontractor, and to = *n ? any subcontractors if 1 am a prime contractor, and to the contracting agency. Contractor's signature Title Date tI1 Mail to: Minnesota Revenue, Mail Station 6610, St. Paul, MN 55146 -6610 Certificate of Compliance Based on records of the Minnesota Department of Revenue, I certify that the contractor who has signed this certificate has fulfilled all the requirements of Minnesota Statutes 290.92 and 270C.66 concerning the withholding of Minnesota income tax from wages paid to employees relating to contract services with the state of Minnesota and /or its subdivisions. Department of Revenue approval Date Stock No. 5000134 (Rev. 1/07) 8rost uct o is for Form 10134 Who must file How to file Information and assistance If you are a prime contractor, a contrac- If you have fulfilled the requirements of If you need help or more information to tor or a subcontractor who did work on a Minnesota withholding tax laws, the De- complete this form, call 651 - 282 -9999. project for the state of Minnesota or any of partment of Revenue will sign your affidavit Additional forms are available on our web - its local government subdivisions — such and return it to you. site at www.taxes.state.mn.us or by calling as a county, city or school district —you If any withholding payments are due to the 651 - 296 -4444. TTY: Call 711 for Minnesota must file Form IC134 with the Minnesota state, Minnesota law requires certified pay- Relay. Department of Revenue. ments before we approve the IC134. This affidavit must be certified and We'll provide information in other formats returned before the state or any of its sub- Submit the certified affidavit to the govern- upon request to persons with disabilities. divisions can make final payment for your ment unit for which the work was done to receive your final payment. If you are a Use of information work. subcontractor, submit the certified affidavit The Department of Revenue needs all the If you're a prime contractor and to your prime contractor to receive your information to determine if you have met a subcontractor on the same final payment. all state income tax withholding require- ments. If all required information is not project Minnesota tax ID number provided, the 1C134 will be returned to you If you were hired as a subcontractor to do You must enter your Minnesota tax ID for completion. work on a project, and you subcontracted number on the form. You must have a Min - all or a part of your portion of the proje nesota tax ID number if you have employ- All information on this affidavit is private to another contractor, you are a prime by state law. It caimot be given to others ees who work in Minnesota. without permission, except to the contractor as well. Complete both the sub- your P exce P contractor and prime contractor areas on a If you don't have a Minnesota ID number, Internal Revenue Service, other states that single form. you must apply for one. Call 651- 282 -5225. guarantee the same privacy and certain When to file An applications (Form ABR) is also avail- government agencies as provided by law. The IC134 cannot be processed until you able on our website at wtinv.taxes.state. finish the work. If you submit the form mn.us. before the project is completed, it will be If you have no employees and did all the returned to you unprocessed. Mail Form work yourself, you do not need a Minnesota IC134 to the address at the bottom of the tax ID number. If this is the case, enter your form. Social Security number in the space for If you are a subcontractor or sole con Minnesota tax ID number and explain who tractor, send in the form when you have did the work. completed your part of the project. If you are a prime contractor, send in the form when the entire project is completed and you have received certified affidavits from all of your subcontractors. This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS NDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE and Issued and Published Jointly by A,C E C . s {ss: tac.is Coc. oi. or Evan, : MSG Co mxima• i � KI imam National Society of ISC of Cwil Engineers American Society Professional Engineers Professional Engineers in Private Practice AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE A Practice Division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS Endorsed by CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (EJCDC C -520 or C -525, 2007 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the Narrative Guide to the EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC C -001, 2007 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC C -800, 2007 Edition). Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 -2794 (703) 684 -2882 www. nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347 -7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191 -4400 (800) 548 -2723 www. asce.org Associated General Contractors of America 2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201 -3308 (703) 548-3118 www. a C c.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1- Definitions and Terminology 1 1.01 Defined Terms 1 1.02 Terminology 4 Article 2 - Preliminary Matters 5 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance 5 2.02 Copies of Documents 5 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed 5 2.04 Starting the Work 5 2.05 Before Starting Construction 5 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives 6 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules 6 Article 3 - Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse 6 3.01 Intent 6 3.02 Reference Standards 6 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 7 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents 7 3.05 Reuse of Documents 8 3.06 Electronic Data 8 Article 4 - Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions; Reference Points 8 4.01 Availability of Lands 8 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions 9 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions 9 4.04 Underground Facilities 10 4.05 Reference Points 11 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site 11 Article 5 - Bonds and Insurance 12 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds 12 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers 13 5.03 Certificates of Insurance 13 5.04 Contractor's Insurance 13 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance 14 5.06 Property Insurance 14 5.07 Waiver of Rights 15 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds 16 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace 16 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer 17 Article 6 - Contractor's Responsibilities 17 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence 17 6.02 Labor; Working Hours 17 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment 17 6.04 Progress Schedule 18 6.05 Substitutes and "Or- Equals" 18 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others 20 EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page i 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties 21 6.08 Permits 21 6.09 Laws and Regulations 21 6.10 Taxes 22 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas 22 6.12 Record Documents 22 6.13 Safety and Protection 22 6.14 Safety Representative 23 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs 23 6.16 Emergencies 23 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples 24 6.18 Continuing the Work 25 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee 25 6.20 Indemnification 26 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services 26 Article 7 - Other Work at the Site 27 7.01 Related Work at Site 27 7.02 Coordination 27 7.03 Legal Relationships 28 Article 8 - Owner's Responsibilities 28 8.01 Communications to Contractor 28 8.02 Replacement of Engineer 28 8.03 Furnish Data 28 8.04 Pay When Due 28 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests 28 8.06 Insurance 28 8.07 Change Orders 28 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals 28 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities 29 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition 29 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements 29 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program 2 9 Article 9 - Engineer's Status During Construction 29 9.01 Owner's Representative 29 9.02 Visits to Site 29 9.03 Project Representative 29 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work 30 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work 30 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments 30 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work 30 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work 30 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities 31 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program 31 Article 10 - Changes in the Work; Claims 31 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work 31 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work 31 10.03 Execution of Change Orders 32 10.04 Notification to Surety 32 10.05 Claims 32 Article 11 - Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work 33 11.01 Cost of the Work 33 11.02 Allowances 35 EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page ii 11.03 Unit Price Work 35 Article 12 - Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Tunes 36 12.01 Change of Contract Price 36 12.02 Change of Contract Times 37 12.03 Delays 37 Article 13 - Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work 37 13.01 Notice of Defects 37 13.02 Access to Work 37 13.03 Tests and Inspections 38 13.04 Uncovering Work 38 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work 39 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work 39 13.07 Correction Period 39 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work 40 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work 40 Article 14 - Payments to Contractor and Completion 40 14.01 Schedule of Values 40 14.02 Progress Payments 41 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title 43 14.04 Substantial Completion 43 14.05 Partial Utilization 43 14.06 Final Inspection 44 14.07 Final Payment 44 14.08 Final Completion Delayed 45 14.09 Waiver of Claims 45 Article 15 - Suspension of Work and Termination 45 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work 45 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause 45 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience 46 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate 47 Article 16 - Dispute Resolution 47 16.01 Methods and Procedures 47 Article 17 - Miscellaneous 47 17.01 Giving Notice 47 17.02 Computation of Times 48 17.03 Cumulative Remedies 48 17.04 Survival of Obligations 48 17.05 Controlling Law 48 17.06 Headings 48 EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page iii ARTICLE 1— DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital Letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda — Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement —The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment- -The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos —Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid —The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidder —The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. 7. Bidding Documents —The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). 8. Bidding Requirements —The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. 9. Change Order —A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim —A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract —The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents —Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price —The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright CO 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 49 14. Contract Times —The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer's written recommendation of final payment. 15. Contractor —The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 11.01 for definition. 17. Drawings —That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement —The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. Engineer —The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20. Field Order —A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21. General Requirements— Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition —The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto. 23. Hazardous Waste —The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations —Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 25. Liens— Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 26. Milestone —A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 27. Notice of Award —The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. 28. Notice to Proceed —A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 29. Owner —The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 30. PCBs — Polychlorinated biphenyls. 31. Petroleum — Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non - Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 32. Progress Schedule —A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 49 33. Project —The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. 34. Project Manual —The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 35. Radioactive Material — Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 36. Resident Project Representative —The authorized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 37. Samples— Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 38. Schedule of Submittals —A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. 39. Schedule of Values —A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 40. Shop Drawings —All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 41. Site —Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights -of -way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 42. Specifications —That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 43. Subcontractor —An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 44. Substantial Completion —The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof 45. Successful Bidder —The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 46. Supplementary Conditions —That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 47. Supplier —A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor. 48. Underground Facilities —All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 49 49. Unit Price Work —Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 50. Work —The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 51. Work Change Directive —A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: 1. The Contract Documents include the terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed" or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day: 1. The word "day" means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective: 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: 1. The word "furnish," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 49 2. The word "install," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in fmal position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, "provide" is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well -known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 — PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 49 serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor's full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor's Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor's Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 — CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 49 Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies: 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; 2. Engineer's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 49 3. Engineer's written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user's sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60 -day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data's creator. ARTICLE 4 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contactor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner's furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 49 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site; and 2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities). B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsui face or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contact Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contactor) of Engineer's findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 49 a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a fmal commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's making such final commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data; b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction; and d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated: 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 49 will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 49 retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 4.06.E. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 — BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 49 Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent or attorney -in -fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual's authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney -in -fact signed each bond. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor. E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. 5.04 Contractor's Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 49 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; 4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 6. include completed operations coverage: a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment. b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter. 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner's option, may purchase and maintain at Owner's expense Owner's own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 49 1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all- risk" policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other Loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07. D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 49 subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or Loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. Loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order. B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non - conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 49 prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner fmds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 — CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 49 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals" A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or- equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below. 1. "Or- Equal" Items: If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an "or- equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service. b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items: a. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or- equal" item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 49 c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: 1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified; 2) will state: a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice Contractor's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; 3) will identify: a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and 4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer's Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer's review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Engineer's Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer's costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 49 for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. F. Contractor's Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or "or- equal" at Contractor's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, �' pP �' Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity; nor 2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contactor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 49 for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor's responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Tunes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 49 entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the perfornance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Per formance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 49 of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner's safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner's safety programs that are applicable to the Work. D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor's safety program with which Owner's and Engineer's employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). F. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such tune as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contactor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Coins nunication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 23 of 49 Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. 2. Samples: a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures: 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have: a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 24 of 49 notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer's Review: 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures: 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor's warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 25 of 49 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to Engineer. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 26 of 49 C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 — OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner's employees, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner's employees, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 27 of 49 B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor's wrongful actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor's wrongful action or inactions. ARTICLE 8 — OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 8.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.0 and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 8.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner's responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 28 of 49 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents. 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Owner's employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor's safety programs of which Owner has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D. ARTICLE 9 — ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 Owner's Representative A. Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer's efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer's authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's visits or observations of Contractor's Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 29 of 49 responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer's consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. D. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer' s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question. B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer's decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 30 of 49 C. Engineer's written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer 's Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer's employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor's safety programs of which Engineer has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D. ARTICLE 10 — CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 31 of 49 supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.D. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner's correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims A. Engineer's Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims. B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part; 2. approve the Claim; or 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 32 of 49 D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. E. Engineer's written action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Tunes will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11— COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b, Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 33 of 49 consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor's fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor's principal and branch offices other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 34 of 49 C. Contractor's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost -plus, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: 1. Contractor agrees that: a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance: 1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 35 of 49 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 — CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be Y adjustment as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor's Fee: The Contractor's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor's fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor's fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 36 of 49 12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not Limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contactor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ARTICLE 13 — TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor's safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 37 of 49 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.0 and 13.03.D below 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer' s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 38 of 49 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor's use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner's written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 39 of 49 E. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contactor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 — PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 40 of 49 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments: 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications: 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer's observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer's knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a fmal determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer's responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4. Neither Engineer's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer's recommendation of any payment, including fmal payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 41 of 49 b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due: 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. D. Reduction in Payment: 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because: a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set -off against the amount recommended; or d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contactor, when Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. 3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 42 of 49 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly after Contractor's notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner's objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a defmitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D for that part of the Work. 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 43 of 49 to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final F nal Pay Went A. Application for Payment: 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer's Review of Application and Acceptance: 1. If, on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer's recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 44 of 49 payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due: 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 — SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 45 of 49 4. Contractor's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion); 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and t Work expedient. 3. complete he ork as Owner may deem ex ten Y P C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor's services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. E. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 46 of 49 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that tune, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph. ARTICLE 16 — DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer's action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or 3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17 — MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the fmi or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 47 of 49 17.02 Computation of Tinges A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations , indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 17.06 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 48 of 49 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TITLE ARTICLE NO. Introduction S.C. 0. Defined Terms S.C. 1.01 Preliminary Schedules S.C. 2.05.A Intent S.C. 3.01 Reference Standards S.C. 3.02 Availability of Lands S.C. 4.01 Contractor's Insurance S.C. 5.04 Contractual Endorsement S.C. 5.04.B Supervision and Superintendence S.C. 6.01 Permits S.C. 6.08 Safety Representative S.C. 6.14 Shop Drawings and Samples S.C. 6.17 Changes in the Work; Claims S.C. 10 Unit Price Work S.C. 11.03.D Change of Contract Price S.C. 12.01.A Change of Contract Times S.C. 12.02.A Test and Inspections S.C. 13.03 Correction or Removal of Defective Work S.C. 13.06 Correction Period S.C. 13.07.A Progress Payments S.C. 14.02 Final Payment S.C. 14.07 Non - Discrimination Toward Handicapped Persons S.C. 17.07 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00700 -50 ARTICLE S.C. 0 INTRODUCTION These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2007 Edition) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions, which are not so amended, or supplemented, remain in full force and effect. ARTICLE S.C. 1.01 DEFINED TERMS The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions, which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2007 Edition) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1. The use of the word "OWNER" refers to the City of Columbia Heights. 2. The use of the word "ENGINEER" refers to the City Engineer (or designated representative) of the City of Columbia Heights. 3. The use of the word "CONTRACTOR" refers to the firm or company contracted to do the work described in these specifications. 4. The use of the word "DEPARTMENT" shall be interpreted to mean the City of Columbia Heights `Engineering' or Public Works Department. ARTICLE S.C. 2.05A PRELIMINARY SCHEDULES Paragraph 2.05A of the General Conditions shall be deleted and the following inserted in its place. "2.05A Within ten (10) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), and before starting any work at the site, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for its timely review:" ARTICLES 2.05A.1; 2.05A.2; AND 2.05A.3 REMAIN AS SHOWN. ARTICLE S.C. 3.01 INTENT Work under these Contract Documents shall be governed by all applicable Federal, State and Local laws, regulations, codes and ordinance and the Contract Documents. In the event of a conflict of meaning between any of the terms of the Contract Documents, the provisions of the document listed first below shall prevail over those of a document listed later: 00700 -51 Contract Agreement Supplementary Conditions Project Plans Proposal and Proposal Form Addenda Technical Specifications General Conditions Special provisions and detail plans are intended to modify and prevail over standard plans and specifications. Should the Contract Documents conflict with any of the laws, regulations, codes, and ordinances mentioned in preceding paragraphs of these Supplementary Conditions, the laws and regulations shall take precedence. This shall not, however, be construed to relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents which are in excess of, but not contrary to, the laws and regulations. ARTICLE S.C. 3.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS The work shall be performed in accordance with the Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specification for Construction ", 2005 edition and any supplements or amendments thereto issued prior to the date of these Contract Documents, except as modified or supplemented by the "Standard Utility Specifications for Water Main and Service Line Installation and Sanitary Sewer and Storm Drain Installation" as published by the League of Minnesota Cities, St. Paul, Minnesota, in 1999 and as modified or supplemented in these General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions or other Contract Documents. Coordination of plans and specifications shall be in accordance with the provisions of Mn/DOT Specification 1504, as modified by the following definitions: 3.02.1 Standard Specifications: Refer in precedent order to the "Standard Utility Specification" revised 1999, of the League of Minnesota Cities, the Mn/DOT Standard Specifications, 2005 edition, and the other specifications of ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, etc., as referenced and as published on the date of the bid advertisement. 3.02.2 Supplemental Specifications: Refer in precedent order to the Supplementary General Conditions and the General Conditions as contained in these Contract Documents. ARTICLE S.C. 4.01 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The fourth sentence of Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions shall be deleted and the following inserted in its place: "If Contractor believes that there has been delay in Owner's furnishing these permits, lands, rights -of -way or easements, Contractor's sole remedy shall be an extension of contract time, for which the Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided in 00700 -52 Article 10.05" ARTICLE S.C. 5.04 CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts, or greater, when required by laws and regulations. 5.04.A.1 and 5.04.A.2 Worker's Compensation, etc., under Paragraphs 5.04.A.1 and 5.04.A.2 of the General Conditions: STATE: STATUTORY APPLICABLE FEDERAL (E.G., LONGSHOREMAN'S) STATUTORY EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY $1,000,000 5.04.A.3; 5.04.A.4; and 5.04.A.5; Comprehensive General Liability (under Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.5 of the General Conditions): 1. Bodily Injury (including completed operations and products liability): $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate 2. Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate or a combined single limit of: $2,000,000 3. Property Damage Liability Insurance will provide Explosion, Collapse and Underground Coverage's where applicable. Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted: $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate 5.04.A.6 Comprehensive Automobile Liability: Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Person $1,000,000 Each Occurrence Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence or combined single limit of: $1,000,000 ARTICLE S.C. 5.04.B CONTRACTUAL ENDORSEMENT The Contractual Liability required by Paragraph 5.04.B of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts: 00700 -53 5.04.B.4.1 Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence 5.04.B.2 Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate The City of Columbia Heights shall be named as an additional insured. ARTICLE S.C. 6.01 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall provide adequate supervision (superintendent) of the work as the job progresses. The superintendent shall report daily to the Engineer on the progress of the work and the number of men on the job. The superintendent shall maintain complete records of the work as it progresses and shall submit these records with each request for payment. The Contractor shall provide an adequate staff for properly coordinating and expediting the work, including office staff to handle by telephone any questions which may arise in the conductance of the work. ARTICLE S.C. 6.08 PERMITS The City of Columbia Heights will obtain permits that are necessary for this work from the following outside agencies: -- * Minnesota Department of Health -- * Metropolitan Council Environmental Service -- * Army Corp of Engineers. The Contractor is responsible to obtain permits that are necessary for this work from the following outside agencies: - - * Minnesota Department of Transportation - - * Anoka County Highway Department -- * Minnesota Pollution Control Agency (including General Storm -water Permit for Construction Activity) * Department of Natural Resources. All work under this contract shall take place on City -owned property, City -owned right -of- way, County -owned right -of -way, Mn/DOT -owned right -of -way, or easements to be obtained by the City under this contract. No work shall commence until the necessary permits are obtained. 00700 -54 Before work is started, the Contractor shall obtain necessary locations of all underground utilities by contacting GOPHER STATE ONE CALL at 651- 454 -0002. ARTICLE S.C. 6.14 SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE Amend Paragraph 6.14.A of the General Conditions by inserting the following after the first sentence: "In addition, Contractor shall provide a "competent person" as defined by O.S.H.A. on site when trench work is being performed." And as so amended Paragraph 6.14.A remains in effect. ARTICLE S.C. 6.17 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES Amend Paragraph 6.17.A.1.b of the General Conditions by inserting the following after the first sentence: "Each shop drawing for a manhole or a catch basin shall reference the plan page number and the structure number." And as so amended Paragraph 6.17.A.1.b remains in effect. ARTICLE S.C. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 10.05.B of the General Conditions to read as follows: "Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter, will be delivered by the Claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but, in no event later than ten days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise thereto." And as so amended Paragraph 10.05.B remains in effect. Except as specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer at the time additional work is done beyond the original scope of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall have and make no claims for additional compensation. The Contractor's plea of ignorance of foreseeable conditions which will create difficulties or hindrances in the execution of the work will not be acceptable to the Owner as an excuse for any failure of the Contractor to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall not be a basis for the Contractor's claim for additional compensation. Any discrepancies in or conflicts between the items described in these Contract Documents must be submitted, in writing, to the Engineer for adjustment prior to proceeding with the work, as any claims for additional compensation to achieve compliance with the requirements of those items will not be allowed or considered. 00700 -55 ARTICLE S.C. 11.03.D UNIT PRICE WORK ARTICLE G.C. 11.03.D shall be amended by deleting this section in its entirety and substituting instead the following language: "There will be no adjustment in unit price for increased or decreased quantities under this Contract." ARTICLE S.C. 12.01.A CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE Amend the second sentence of Paragraph 12.01.A of the General Conditions to read as follows: "Any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to the Engineer promptly (but, in no event later than ten days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general notice of the claim." And as so amended Paragraph 12.01.A remains in effect. ARTICLE S.C. 12.02.A CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES Amend the second sentence of Paragraph 12.02A of the General Conditions to read as follows: "Any claim for an extension or shortening of the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but, in no event later than ten days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim." And as so amended Paragraph 12.02.A remains in effect. ARTICLE S.C. 13.03 TEST AND INSPECTIONS ARTICLE G.C. 13.03.B shall be amended by deleting this section in its entirety and substituting instead the following language: "The testing of materials called for in the Contract Documents shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer, except as otherwise specified. All tests required by the Engineer shall be ordered and paid for by the Contractor at all specified locations. All tests on material to be placed shall be completed prior to the placing of any material. All retests due to failure of original tests shall be paid for by the Contractor until satisfactorily passing in accordance with the minimum requirements identified or referenced in the contract documents. 00700 -56 Signed copies of all reports on tests shall be sent at once to the Engineer and the Contractor. These copies shall be received by the Engineer prior to the placing of any of the tested items. Tests shall be made in accordance with the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard and Tentative specifications that apply, except as otherwise specified. Rejected materials shall immediately be removed from the site and shall not be used in the work. Inspection and testing shall in no way relieve the Contractor or supplier from the responsibility of furnishing materials and workmanship in accordance with the plans and specifications. Density tests will be by "Specified Density" method." ARTICLE S.C. 13.06 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK Amend Paragraph 13.06.A of the General Conditions by inserting the following after the first sentence: "Correction work for bituminous surfacing shall conform to the requirements and standard plates in the City's right -of -way ordinance." And as so amended Paragraph 13.06.A remains in effect. ARTICLE S.C. 13.07.A CORRECTION PERIOD Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 13.07.A of the General Conditions to read as follows: "If within two years after the date of substantial completion in utility trench areas and one year after the date of substantial completion for the remainder of the construction, or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for CONTRACTOR's use by OWNER or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions: (i) repair such defective land or areas, or (ii) correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (iii) satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom." And as so amended Paragraph 13.07.A remains in effect. ARTICLE S.C. 14.02 PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Contractor must pay any subcontractor for undisputed services provided by the subcontractor within ten (10) days of the Contractor's receipt of payment from the owner. 00700 -57 The Contractor must pay interest of 1 /z percent per month or any part of a month to the subcontractor or any undisputed amount not paid on time to the subcontractor. The minimum monthly interest penalty payment for an unpaid balance of $100 or more is $10. For an unpaid balance of less than $100, the Contractor shall pay the actual penalty due to the subcontractor. A subcontractor who prevails in a civil action to collect interest penalties from the Contractor must be awarded its costs and disbursements, including attorney's fees, incurred in bringing the action. ARTICLE S.C. 14.07 FINAL PAYMENT Before final payment is made for the work on this project, the Contractor must make a satisfactory showing that he has complied with the provisions of M.S.A. 290.92 requiring the withholding of State income taxes for wages paid to employees on this project. Receipt by the Owner of the Certificates of Compliance from the Commissioner of Taxation (IC -134) will satisfy this requirement. The Contractor is advised that before such certificate can be issued, he must first place on file with the Commissioner of Taxation an affidavit that he has complied with the provisions of M.S.A 290.92. The required affidavit form will be supplied by the Commissioner of Taxation, Centennial Office Building, St. Paul, Minnesota, on request. ARTICLE S.C. 17 MISCELLANEOUS ADD: ARTICLE S.C. 17.07 NON - DISCRIMINATION TOWARD HANDICAPPED PERSONS Before final payment is made for work on this project, the Contractor shall submit a letter to the Owner stating that the Contractor's firm maintains a policy of non - discrimination towards persons with handicapped conditions. 00700 -58 01300 - SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 1. GENERAL A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. B. This Section defines procedures for the following submittals required by the Contract Documents. 2. SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS - REQUIRED A. The following documents are required to be submitted to the Engineer for review at the times indicated. 1. Prior to Bidding (seven (7) days prior to bid opening): Request for approval of substitute material and equipment. 2. Within 10 days of Letter of Contract Award: Performance and Payment Bonds Insurance Certificate Schedule of Values (based on specification sections) List of materials and equipment List of subcontractors Shop drawings and required submittals 3. During Progress of Project as specified: Samples Test results Application for Payment (see Specifications Section 01025) 4. Upon receipt of Substantial Completion Certificate, submit the following documents within 30 days: a. Equipment and material guarantees Operations manuals b. As -built drawing notes c. Completed punch lists Final payment request accompanied by: 1. Affidavit of Payment of Claims 2. Affidavit of Release of Liens 3. Withholding Tax Affidavit 4. Consent of Surety to Final Payment Note: No final retainage payment will be released without the receipt and approval of the above referenced documents. 3. SHOP DRAWINGS 23 01300 - SUBMITTALS A. Reference Section 00700 - General Conditions, and the following: 1. Hollow Metal Door Frames 2. Wood Doors 3. Bullet Resistant Windows and Doors B. Six copies of shop drawings prepared specifically for this work shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for submittal to the Architect. Contractors are to review and stamp shop drawings or they will be returned. At least 40 square inches of space in the lower right hand corner of each sheet shall be left blank for approval stamps and notes. After the Architect has checked and approved each drawing, he will so stamp it, make such copies as he requires and return it through the Construction Manager to the Contractor who shall make and distribute such copies as he requires. In instances where minor corrections are required, they will be so noted on the drawing and it will be stamped "Make Corrections Noted" and returned to the Contractor as above. Where major corrections are required, the shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor who shall make a new drawing incorporating the required corrections and resubmit six copies of the revised drawings for approval. C. Shop drawings in the form of printed descriptive information shall be bound together with a title and index sheet listing each sheet in the binding. The title and index sheet shall have a blank rectangular space of at least 4" x 8" for notes and approval stamps. Six copies are to be submitted to the Construction Manager. D. Shop drawings and samples shall be dated and contain: Nantes of project, description or names of equipment, materials and items; and complete identification of locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed. E. Submission of shop drawings shall be accompanied by transmittal letter, containing project name, Contractor's name, number of drawings, titles and other pertinent data such as section and article numbers. 4. SAMPLES A. Reference Section 00700 - General Conditions, and the following: B. Deliver samples of materials, equipment, assemblies and components as required by specifications to Construction Manager for submittal to the Architect (or other designated location) with delivery costs prepaid. At Construction Manager's direction, remove samples after approval. Samples shall be of like kind to the products to be provided for building and shall have finish and other characteristics required by work. Samples shall indicated type of construction and quality proposed for installation in the project. C. Where the Contractor requires approved samples to be returned, submit the 24 01300 - SUBMITTALS number of samples required by the Contractor plus three (3) which shall be retained by the Architect and Construction Manager. 5. LIST OF MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 00700 - General Conditions, and Section 00800 Supplemental Conditions, and as follows: B. Within ten (10) days after the award of the contract (notice to proceed or letter of intent), the Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of a complete list of all materials, products, and equipment proposed to be used in construction to the Construction Manager for acceptance. Materials shall not be ordered until the proposed listed materials, products and equipment proposed to be used in construction are reviewed by the Architect for acceptance and the listed materials are accepted. C. Where two or more makes or kinds of items are named in the specifications (or additional names are called for in addendum), the Contractor shall state which particular make or kind of each item he proposes to provide, If the Contractor fails to state a preference, the Owner shall have the right to select any of the makes of kinds named without change in price. D. This list shall be arranged in order of specification sections. The items listed shall fully conform to project requirements and specifications. All materials are subject to the Architect's acceptance. After acceptance, there shall be no changes or substitutions. E. The list shall clearly identify the material, product or equipment by manufacturer and brand by listing the naives, for all items, including those where only one material or product is specified. Each and all material, products and equipment shall be specifically names, not listed "as specified ". 6. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS A. Refer to Section 00700 - General Conditions, and Section 00800 Supplemental Conditions, and as follows: B. Within ten (10) days after the award of the contract (notice to proceed) and prior to the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of a complete list of all work he proposes to subcontract and the subcontractors (and major material suppliers) he proposes to use in performance of the Contract to the Construction Manager for review by the Architect, Construction Manager and Owner. The list shall include Sub - subcontractors. No subcontracts shall be executed until the proposed list of subcontractors is accepted. C. Reasonable objection shall be deemed to have been exercised when, in the opinion of the Architect or Owner, objections have been made based on their i 25 01300 - SUBMITTALS reasonable belief that the proposed Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material supplier: (1) cannot provide materials, equipment, facilities or other products as specified or required by the Contract Documents; (2) cannot provide labor and skill necessary to accomplish the part of Work for which he is proposed, including but not limited to quality of workmanship; (3) lacks adequate and appropriate experience for the part of the Work for which he is proposed, including materials or methods required; (4) has previously failed to perform timely or satisfactorily, including in cooperation and in necessary services after project completion; (5) proposed deviations in material or methods that are unacceptable to the Architect or Owner, such as proposing materials or methods that were not specified or not listed in addenda; (6) there is reasonable doubt he can satisfactorily perform the part of the Work for which he is proposed, within the time schedule, due to size of organization or existing work load; 7) cannot demonstrate his ability through quality or representative work to perform the part of the Work for which he is being considered; (8) of questionable integrity; (9) or other similar considerations bearing on the possibility of unsatisfactory performance. If the Owner, Construction Manager or the Architect has a reasonable objection. to any person or entity proposed by a substitute to whom neither the Owner, Construction Manager, nor the Architect has any reasonable objection and no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed as a result of any such substitution. D. After review of the proposed list, no change of any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or supplier not objected to by the Architect, Construction Manager or Owner, shall be made, except for cause acceptable to all parties. In the event of a proposed change, the Contractor shall submit the reasons for the change, in writing, along with the alternate proposed Subcontractor, Sub- - subcontractor or material supplier. The proposed change is subject to the conditions of this Article and the requirements of the General Conditions. 7. GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. Refer to Section 00700 - General Conditions, Article 3.5 and 9.3.3 and Section 00800 - Supplemental Conditions. B. Special Warranties: Contractor shall complete all manufacturer's warranty registrations and shall submit same to Construction Manager for transmittal to Owner. 8. INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. For all items of mechanical equipment and electrical apparatus, the Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer and furnish to the Construction Manager three (3) copies of the following: 1 Operating instructions. 26 01300 - SUBMITTALS 2 Parts lists (including name and address of nearest vendor or service agent) 3 Maintenance instructions. 4 Shop Drawings. B. These items are separate from and in addition to the operating placards required to be attached to or posted near the equipment. C. Contractor shall provide field instruction to Owner's personnel as required to fully instruct them in correct operating and maintenance procedure, for all equipment installed under this contract. D. Manual shall be submitted in 8-1/2" x 11" form in adequately sized three (3) ring loose leaf binders with entire contents indexed and thumb- tabbed. 9. RECORD SET OF DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall provide the record set of drawings to the Construction Manager at the completion of Contract. B. During construction, Contractor shall maintain a clean set of drawings for the sole purpose of recording changes and actual "as installed" information. C. As a general guide, the type of information to be recorded on the record set includes: (1) changes, deviations or revisions made, except minor or non- critical dimensions, including those made by Change Order or Supplementary Instructions; (2) omissions, including work omitted by accepted alternates; (3) dimensioned locations of major or main utility lines, such as main conduit runs, piping mains and similar work; (4) locations of control valves; (5) additions to the work; (6) changes in significant details; (7) changed footing or other elevations; (8) changes in locations of panelboards, outlets, drains, piping, opening, dampers and similar features; (9) other similar data. Refer to Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. END OF SECTION 01300 27 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL TESTING SERVICES SECTION 01400 QUALITY TESTING SERVICES 1. GENERAL, A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. B. This section specifies the general requirements for testing and inspection services. C. Cooperate with Owner's testing laboratory and all others responsible for testing and inspecting the Work. D. Provide other testing and inspecting as specified to be furnished by the Contractor in this Section and /or elsewhere in these Specifications. E. Provide quality control by the observation and acceptance of work by others being built upon. F. Related work described elsewhere: 1. Requirements for testing are described in Divisions 3, 4 and 5 product sections of these Specifications. 2. Where no testing requirements are described, but the Engineer decides that testing is required, he may direct that such testing be performed under current standards for testing and the General Conditions. G. Selection of testing laboratory The Owner shall hire and pay for an independent testing laboratory. 2. CODES AND STANDARDS A. Testing, when required, will be in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations and with selected standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials. 3. REVIEW OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. On all Project Drawings, figures take precedence over measurement by scale, and any scaling is done at the Contractor's own risk. Before ordering any materials or performing any Work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the project site and be responsible for the correctness of same. B. Promptly respond to test reports and related instructions to ensure necessary retesting and replacement of materials with the least possible delay in progress of the Work. 4. FIELD CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the Contract Documents and any shop drawings and product data before commencing any related work. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions shall be 28 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL TESTING SERVICES reported to the Engineer /Architect at once. 5. PAYMENT FOR TESTING A. Initial Services: The Owner's Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for initial testing services as outlined in various sections of the General Conditions. B. Re- Testing Services: When initial tests indicate non - compliance with the Contract Documents, all subsequent retesting occasioned by the non- compliance shall be performed by the same testing agency and the costs thereof will be borne by the Contractor responsible for the work that is non- compliant. 6. TESTING A. Code Compliance Testing: Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by a plan approval authority, and which are made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of and shall be paid for by the Contractor, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor's Convenience Testing: Inspecting and testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 7. INSPECTION A. Inspection by Owner's Personnel: From time to time, personnel in the employ of the Owner may inspect the Work where the Work is in progress, but shall have no authority to direct the Contractor or request changes in the Work except through the Engineer /Architect. B. Inspection of Work by Others: Each Contractor shall inspect Work of others which will receive or is adjacent to his Work before commencing his Work. Do not proceed until conditions which would result in a less than first class installation are satisfactorily corrected. Commencing Work shall be construed as acceptance of the Work of others, by the Contractor, as satisfactory to receive his Work. The Contractor shall bear all costs to correct the unsatisfactory Work. 8. COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY A. Representatives of the testing laboratory shall have access to the Work at all times. Provide facilities for such access in order that the laboratory may properly perfonn its function. B. Specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, will be taken by the testing personnel. Sampling equipment and personnel will be provided by the testing laboratory. Deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing laboratory. C. Test results and reports shall be furnished simultaneously to the Engineer (2 copies) and the Construction Manager (1 copy) within one week of testing. 29 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL TESTING SERVICES 9. TESTING SCHEDULE A. The Owner shall pre - qualify and identify qualified independent inspection agencies in a timely manner, allowing Engineer adequate time for review and approval. B. Special Structural Testing Schedule to be implemented per specifications. C. When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction, the Engineer shall coordinate such changes of schedule with the testing laboratory as required. D. When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the established schedule, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of the Work, all extra charges for testing attributable to the delay may be backcharged to the Contractor and shall not be borne by the Owner. 30 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 1. GENERAL. A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. No separate payment will be made for any work under this Section. C. Work required by this Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Temporary utilities: a. Water service and distribution. b. Temporary electric power and light. c. Temporary heat. d. Telephone service. 2. Temporary construction and support facilities: a. Field offices and storage sheds. b. Sanitary facilities. c. Temporary structure enclosures. d. Temporary signs. e. Waste disposal services. f. Rodent and pest control. g. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. 3. Temporary security and protection facilities: a. Temporary fire protection. b. Site enclosures, barricades, warning signs, lights. c. Environmental protection. 4. Dumpsters: The Contractor will pay for and the Contractor will provide and coordinate metal containers (dumpsters) for collection of debris. a. Contractor shall not abuse use of dumpsters. b. Contractor shall not cross - contaminate any designated containers. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building code requirements 2. Health and safety regulations 3. Utility company regulations 31 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES 4. Police, fire department and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations ", ANSI -AIO Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition ", and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities ". Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services ", prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. C. Electrical Service: Comply with NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFP A 70). D. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 3. TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. All existing utilities may be used to the extent of accessibility and to the extent that their use by the Contractor does not in any way interrupt the Owner's activities. Existing utilities used by the Contractor shall not be abused or misused in any way. B. Water Service and Distribution: 1) Water needed for the execution of this contract may be furnished from sources located within the building. C. Temporary Electric Power and Light: 1) For electrical requirements, the Electrical Contractor shall snake all arrangements necessary and pay for: a. Temporary power service required during construction. b. Pay for all temporary permits. c. Electricity used on the job will not be charged to the Contractor. d. Provide temporary lighting with local switching. (1) Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements, without operating the entire system, and will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. (2) Unless otherwise noted in the Electrical Specifications, provide the following minimum requirements: (a) Temporary lighting shall be provided at not less than 1/2 watt per square foot with not less than one light outlet per room or space. All lamp outlets shall be lamped with 200 watt inside frosted lamps. 32 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES (b) Temporary 20 amp, 120 volts receptacles shall be provided at locations within the construction zone at not less than 75 feet apart. 2) Remove temporary electrical items when permanent power and /or lighting is activated. 3) Electrical Contractor to furnish, install and maintain all necessary safety, warning and security lights to prevent injury to persons or damage to property. 4) Each Contractor shall provide extension cords required for his operations. 5) Each Contractor shall provide any heavy -duty electrical power, exceeding available temporary power, required for his operations. 6) Prior to substantial completion, replace all burned out bulbs and tubes. 4. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES A. Field Offices and Storage Sheds: General Contractor, and other prime Subcontractors, shall provide a temporary field office unless otherwise pre- arranged with the Owner. Structures shall be of incombustible construction when located within the construction area, or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. 1) Storage sheds shall be sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the new building or elsewhere on the site. B. Sanitary Facilities: 1) Use of Owner's sanitary facilities in the adjacent apparatus bay will be allowed providing the Contractor maintains the cleanliness of the facilities. C. Temporary Building Enclosures: 1) Interior Enclosure: The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain area separations within the building to eliminate non- construction traffic and non - authorized traffic or provide security or protection from hazardous construction conditions. E. Temporary Signs: 1) Project Signs: Will not be required. 2) Contractor Identification Signs: Will not be permitted without Owner • approval. F. Waste Disposal Service: Each Sub - contractor shall collect waste from the construction areas and dispose of in dumpsters as provided by the Contractor. Contractors not complying with the removal of construction waste shall be backcharged by the Owner for removal of construction debris. 33 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES G. Construction Aids and Miscellaneous Services: 1) Scaffolding: Each Contractor to be responsible for his own scaffolding. 2) Blocking Backing and Grounds: Each Contractor to be responsible for providing the blocking, backing and grounds in all walls and above ceilings necessary for the installation of his work. 5. TEMPORARY SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES: A. Temporary Fire Protection: The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers ", and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations ". 1) Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2) Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations. 3) Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities and access routes for fighting fire. 4) Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units and similar sources of fire ignition. 5) Tobacco products are prohibited on the Owner's premises. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. 6. OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Engineer requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1) Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of 34 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES the Contractor. 2) At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that have been used during the construction period, including but not limited to: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dinned by substantial hours of use. d. Clean toilet room. END OF SECTION 01500 35 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies qualification of materials, products, and equipment used throughout Specifications. 1.02 METHODS OF SPECIFICATION A. Materials, products, and equipment may be specified in one or more of the following ways: 1 Descriptive Specifications: This method describes characteristics or product in detail. Where descriptive specifications are used, provide fabrication and erection drawings and other data necessary to obtain approval of the product before fabrication and installation. 2 Proprietary Specifications: This method names one or more brand name products that are acceptable for application. At least one product will generally be identified by brand name and catalog reference in detail. Where another acceptable manufacturer's product, not specified in detail, is proposed for use, submit data to prove product's equivalency and as allowed by Bidding Requirements. Use of such products is subject to approval of Engineer for minor and normal variations from specified standard product. 3 Reference Standards: This method specifies products or methods by incorporating commonly used industry standards such as ASTM, ANSI, ACI, CS, Federal Specifications, or trade association standards. Where reference standards are named, provide the highest quality applicable to particular installation, approved by Engineer. Where Specifications conflict with reference standard, satisfy more stringent requirements, unless Engineer approves otherwise in writing. In cases where not sure of intent, apply in writing for interpretation. Do not proceed without clarification. 4 Performance Specifications: This method specifies desired performance of product or assembly and requires selection or design of a product or assembly that will satisfy performance requirements. Provide data to prove acceptability of selection or design. Data may take form of design drawings, test data, performance criteria, fabrication drawings or photographs. Engineer will be judge of a product's acceptability for a particular application. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Materials, products, systems and equipment shown and described in Contract Documents establish a standard of required function, appearance and quality to be met by proposed substitution. B. When a single manufacturer of material, product, system or equipment is 36 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS specifically named and specified, no substitution will be allowed. C. When more than one manufacturer of material, product, system or equipment is listed under the same heading, choice of selection of those listed shall be at the Bidders option. One manufacturer may be identified and specified as reference to establish a design and quality standard and when another is considered, the Bidder, before purchase or use, will be expected to submit such data necessary to prove the equivalency to that specified. The consideration is subject to approval of Engineer as accepting minor and normal variations from that specified. D. When a manufacturer of material, product, system or equipment is named and followed by term OR EQUAL, substitution approval will not be required. More than one manufacturer may be listed. If substitution of unlisted manufacturer is proposed, written request with qualifications shall be made to Engineer before purchase or use. Use of non - approved material, product, system or equipment will be cause to supply named material without change in cost to Owner. E. When a material, product, system or equipment and manufacturer is named and followed by term OR APPROVED SUBSTITUTION, written request may be made to Engineer for substitution no later than 7 days prior to bid closing time and date. It is understood that specified material, product, equipment and manufacturer is named to fix a standard of design, function and quality and requested substitution shall equal or exceed specified. Burden of proof of merit of proposed substitution is upon proposer. Engineer's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be fmal. Substitution requests shall include and comply with: 1. General reference to sales brochure or Sweets Catalog File is not acceptable as supporting information and will be rejected. 2. Clearly identify material, product, system or equipment substitution requested for by Specification Section number. 3. Supply specific technical description and illustrations of substitute as applied to this Project. 4. Supply supporting Spec -Data or Manu -Spec sheets. 5. Supply supporting samples of materials, fabrication details, assembly and finishes as requested. 6. Should any part of associated construction be changed because of OR APPROVED SUBSTITUTION substitute acceptance, cost of these changes shall be included as part of Work of accepted substitute. F. Include with substitute request a stamped, self - addressed envelope for Engineer's return response to request. G. Approval prior to date for receipt of bids is required for product substitutions. Refer to Conditions of the Contract, Instruction to Bidders, and Document 00210, for requirements. Response to OR APPROVED SUBSTITUTION, 37 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS substitution request will be reviewed by Engineer and those accepted will be noted in [an Addendum] [writing to Contractor.] Do not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. H. Construction cost is based upon materials and equipment specified or approved substitution. Engineer and Owner will not consider substitutions after execution of Contract Agreement except in cases where it is necessary because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, or production of a product has been discontinued. Submit written request for substitution not later than 10 days after date of notification that specified or prior approved materials or equipment cannot be obtained. Engineer will review requests for substitutions and notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. I. Submit each request for substitution separately. Support request with complete descriptive data, drawings, and samples as appropriate. Include: 1. Comparison of qualities of proposed substitution with that specified. 2. Changes required in Work elements because of substitution. 3. Effect on construction schedule. 4. Cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified. 5. Required license fees, and royalties. 6. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials. J. Request for substitution constitutes representation that: 1. Proposed substitute product has been investigated and determined to be as good as or better than product specified. 2. Will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as product specified. 3. Will coordinate installation of an accepted substitution into Work, and make required changes to provide a complete Project. 4. Waive claims for additional costs that may subsequently become apparent. K. Submit information required for Engineer to prepare Change Order. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality of manufacture: Products or standards named in Contract Documents are specified to establish standards of quality, performance and design concept. Equivalent products of other named manufacturers are acceptable subject to written approval by Engineer for minor deviations from specified standards. B. Reuse of existing material or equipment is prohibited. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Arrange delivery of products in accordance with construction progress 38 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS schedule to avoid delay of Work, to avoid conflict with Work and condition at Project site, and to avoid unnecessary accumulation of stored materials, products, and equipment. Delivery process includes: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts. Identify parts to permit easy retrieval and simplify installation. 3. At delivery, inspect shipment to assure: a. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents including reviewed submittals. b. Products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Coordinate and schedule with product suppliers and subcontractors, delivery of materials, products, and equipment. C. Deliver materials and equipment to designated storage areas. D. Unloading and handling of materials, products, and equipment during delivery: 1. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, using methods that will prevent damage caused by bending, twisting, denting, soiling, scratching, and the like, of products and their packaging. 2. Keep handling to a minimum. 3. Lift and support heavy components only at designated lifting and support points. E. Remove damaged and deteriorated material and equipment form site, and provide new material and equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 39 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1. GENERAL A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1) Inspection procedures. 2) Project record document submittal. 3) Operating and maintenance manual submittal. 4) Submittal of warranties. 5) Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. 2. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following: List exceptions in the request. 1) In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2) Advise Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements. 3) Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 4) Remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock -ups, and similar elements. B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Engineer will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1) The Engineer will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2) Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 3. FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of 40 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1) Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. Conform to the requirements of Section 01025 - Application for Payment. 2) Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3) Submit a certified copy of the Engineer's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Engineer. 4) Submit consent of surety to final payment. 5) Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Reinspection Procedure: The Engineer will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Engineer. 1) Upon completion of reinspection, the Engineer will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise, the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2) If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. 4. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. When the Owner has determined that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, Trade Contractor shall prepare and submit final Application for Payment to the Engineer together with, but not limited to, the following: 1) Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706 (most recent edition of fonn). 2) Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A (most recent edition of form). 3) Contractor's Lien waiver in the full amount of the Contract Sum. 4) Lien waivers from all subcontractors, sub - subcontractors and major material suppliers who have furnished material for the work under the contract with the Trade Contractor or a subcontractor. The lien waivers shall be in the full amount of the contract involved. 5) Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, A1A Document G707, (most recent edition of form). 6) Affidavit for obtaining final settlement of Contract with the State of 41 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Minnesota and any of its Political of Governmental Subdivisions, Department of Revenue Form IC -134. 7) Evidence of Compliance with requirements of governing authorities: a. Certificate of inspection from all required agencies and departments. b. Certificate of Occupancy. 8) Project Record Documents. 9) Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel. 10) Warranties and Bonds. 11) Special tools required for Owner maintenance. B. Submit four copies each of Items #1 through #5 above, and two copies each of Items #6 and #7 above. 5. RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire- resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Engineer's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white - prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross - reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1) Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2) Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3) Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 4) Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the test of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observations. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 1) Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Engineer 42 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT for the Owner's records. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record - keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Construction Manager for the Owner's records. 6. FINAL CLEANING A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section "Temporary Facilities." B. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. C. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. END OF SECTION 01700 43 01710 - CLEANING UP SECTION 01710 CLEANING UP 1.01 GENERAL A. The Contractors shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for cleaning up required in conjunction with work performed, as shown on drawings and as specified, in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents and completely coordinated with work of all other trades. B. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. C. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at Substantial Completion. 1) Special cleaning requirements for specific elements of the Work are included in appropriate Sections of Divisions 2 through 16. 2) Multiple Prime Contracts: Except as otherwise indicated, each Prirne Contractor is responsible for coordination of final cleaning where more than one Prirne Contractor is involved in final cleaning a single area or piece of equipment. 3) Environmental Requirements: Conduct cleaning and waste disposal operations in compliance with local laws and ordinances. Comply fully with federal and local environmental and anti - pollution regulations. a. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. b. Burning or burying of debris, rubbish or other waste material on the premises will not be permitted. 4) Related work specified elsewhere: a. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout, include general project closeout requirements. b. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities, include general cleanup and waste removal requirements. 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property, or that might damage finished surfaces. 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Oversee cleaning and ensure that building and grounds are maintained free from accumulation of waste and rubbish. 1) Special attention shall be given to cleaning up the site of debris, waste and 44 01710 -CLEANING UP rubbish. B. At reasonable intervals, minimum once a week, clean up site and access and dispose of debris. C. Provide metal containers for collection of debris. D. Remove debris from site. Legally dispose of off Owner's site. E. Vacuum interior areas when ready for painting. F. Handle waste materials in a controlled manner. Do not drop or throw materials from heights. G. Schedule cleaning operations so that contaminants resulting from cleaning do not fall on wet painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 01710 45 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.01 GENERAL. A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and performing all work and services to provide record documents as specified, in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with work of all other trades. B. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents. 1) Project Record Documents required include: a. Marked -up copies of Contract Drawings. b. Marked -up copies of Shop Drawings. c. Newly prepared Drawings. d. Marked -up copies of Specifications, addenda and Change Orders. e. Marked -up Product Data submittals. f. Record Samples. g. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. h. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically. 2) Maintenance of Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from Contract Documents used for construction. Do not permit Project Record Documents to be used for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order, and in a clean, dry, legible condition. Make documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the Architect. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1) Section 01700 - Project Closeout, includes general project closeout requirements. 2) Section 01300 - Submittals, includes general requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents. 2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Mark -up Procedure: During the construction period, maintain a set of blue -or black -line white- prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record Document purposes. Include the printed designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS" in a prominent location on each Drawing. 1) Mark these Drawings to indicate the actual installation where the installation varies appreciably from the installation shown originally. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements which would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Items required to be marked include but are not limited to: 46 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS a. Dimensional changes to the Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on the Drawings. c. Changes made by Change Order. d. Details not on original Contract Drawings. e. RFPs, SIs, PCOs. 2) Mark completely and accurately record prints of Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross - reference on Contract Drawings location. 3) Mark record sets with red erasable colored pencil; use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 4) Mark important additional information which was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 5) Note construction change directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers and similar identification. 6) Responsibility for Markup: Where feasible, the individual or entity who obtained record data, whether the individual or entity is the installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, is required to prepare the mark -up on record Drawings. a. Accurately record information m an understandable Drawing technique. b. Record data as soon as possible after it has been obtained. In the case of concealed installations, record and check the mark -up prior to concealment. c. At time of Substantial Completion, submit three (3) copies of the record Drawings to Construction Manager for the Architect's approval. Upon Architect's approval, the Drawings will then become the Owner's records. Organize into sets, bind and label sets for Owner's continued use. 3.01 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. During the construction period, maintain one copy of the Project Specifications, including addenda and modifications issued, for Project Record Document purposes. 1) Mark the Specifications to indicate the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from that indicated in Specifications and modifications issued. Note related Project Record Drawing information, where applicable. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of product options, and information on concealed installations that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. 47 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS a. In each Specification Section where products, materials or units of equipment are specified or scheduled, mark the copy with the proprietary name and model number of the product furnished. 2) Upon completion of mark -up, submit record Specifications to the Construction Manager for Owner's records. 4.01 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. During the construction period, maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal for Project Record Document purposes. 1) Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where the installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submitted. Include significant changes in the product delivered to the site, and changes in manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. 2) Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 3) Note related Change Orders and mark -up of record Drawings, where applicable. 4) Upon completion of mark -up, submit a complete set of record Product Data to the Construction Manager for the Owner's records. 5) Where record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit marked -up Product Data as an insert in the manual, instead of submittal as record Product Data. 6) Each prime Contractor is responsible for mark -up and submittal of record Product Data for its own Work. 5.01 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record - keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for use and reference. Submit to the Construction Manager for the Owner's records. 1) Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to the following: a. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities. b. Final inspection and correction procedures. 6.01 RECORDING A. Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur. Do not wait until the end of the Project. END OF SECTION 01720 48 I 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SECTION 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Selective demolition required to complete Work unless otherwise stated. Demolition work includes securing and paying for permits, governmental fees and disconnection charges; protection of existing work and services scheduled to remain; removal of debris from site. B. Occupancy: 1 Areas to be demolished will be vacated and discontinued in use prior to start of work. 2 Owner will continuously occupy areas of building surrounding construction limits. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide temporary enclosures and protective covering to prevent dust, debris, sound, water and other undesirable intrusions into unaffected areas and equipment to remain. B. Provide temporary enclosures to protect existing building from weather and elements. C. Remove, relocate, and provide materials to accomplish work, including: 1 Cutting and patching for openings, unless otherwise indicated. 2 Remove finishes as indicated to accomplish work and to prevent patch -in appearance. D. Maintain access and means of egress for occupants from existing facilities. E. Protect public, existing structures, existing materials, existing finishes, and existing equipment that are scheduled to remain. F. Reroute, relocate, and remove existing piping, equipment, and ductwork to provide clearances for new Work. G. Reroute, relocate, and remove existing lighting fixtures, outlets, signaling devices, controls, conduit and wiring, and other electrical work to facilitate new construction. H. If existing material that affects Work is found and suspected to be hazardous, stop work and notify Engineer and Owner. Owner will have material tested, if found to be hazardous, will remove material. I. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Contract Start-up: 1 Permits and notices authorizing selective demolition, where applicable. 49 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 2 Certificates of severance of utilities services, where applicable. 3 Permits for transport and disposal of debris 4 Demolition procedures and operational sequence. B. Project Record Documents: 1 Include detailed drawings indicating locations and depths of capped, abandoned, and relocated utilities. Submit in accordance with Section 01786. 2 Pre - demolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities before starting demolition work. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Latent Conditions: Refers only to conditions buried in wall or floor construction that could not be discovered or anticipated without demolition of floor or wall. 1 Conditions above suspended ceilings will not be deemed as latent conditions, nor will a feature or material, such as conduit or piping, be deemed as a latent condition where such feature entering wall or slab may be seen or found without demolition. 2 If, in performance of work, latent conditions are found to be substantially different from those indicated, specified or found by examination, or unknown conditions usually inherent in work of character indicated or specified, Architect may make such changes as he finds necessary, and changes will be adjusted as provided under Changes of Work. 3 If, during work of this Project, structural members are uncovered or bearing wall indicated to be removed and new structural supports are not indicated, stop work in that area and notify Architect/Engineer for instructions on how to proceed. B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be demolished. C. Owner will maintain conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes in so far as practical. However, variations in structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operation prior to start of demolition work. 1.05 SEQUENCING A. Prepare for Engineer's review, detailed schedule showing commencement dates, order, and completion dates for various parts of selective demolition. Include, but do not limit to: 1 Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 50 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 2 Interruption of utility services. 3 Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4 Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Framing Materials: Wood, or other approved material, new or used, structurally sound of size and length to adequately support loads that may be imposed, including wind. B. Dust Control Materials: Provide non - staining tape or gaskets as required to provide dust tight barriers. C. Roof membrane protection specified in Section in Section 01500. 2.02 MATERIALS REMOVED A. Owner reserves right to retain removed equipment, applicable accessories, appurtenances, and connections that would be necessary to reinstall item. Verify with Owner if items are to be retained, prior to disposal. B. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain possession of materials being demolished. Promptly remove from Project site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Erect and maintain dust tight partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes and smoke to other parts of building. On completion, remove partitions and repair damaged surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. B. Dust Tight Partitions: Erect where indicated on Drawings, at openings to occupied areas, to protect equipment, and to maintain portion of structure that is to remain free of construction traffic and dust. 1 Construct wood framed partitions with plywood applied to clean side of partition. Provide hinged, self closing, passage doors equipped with locks. 2 Where used in temporary protection, treat and label plywood and wood framing members with fire retardant chemicals to provide a fire hazard classification of 25 or less per Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Do not use canvas, polyethylene sheet, and combustible wall boards. C. Do not interfere with use of adjacent buildings. D. Erect weatherproof closures for exterior openings. Maintain exit requirements. 51 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION E. Carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience as possible to adjacent occupied building areas. F. Ensure safe passage of persons around area of selective demolition. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons. G. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, and support to prevent movement, settlement, and collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent areas and facilities to remain. I. Provide fire protection as required by local fire department and other agencies having jurisdiction. J. Prevent movement, settlement and collapse of adjacent areas, services, sidewalks, driveways and trees. Assume liability for such movement, settlement, and collapse. K. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities and services caused by demolition operations at no cost to Owner and adjacent property owners. L. Provide, erect, and maintain barricades, scaffolding, sidewalk bridges, fences, lighting and guardrails as required to protect general public, workers, and adjoining property. Provide warning lights and maintain in good working order. M. Protect existing roof membrane as specified in Section 01500. 3.03 EXISTING SERVICES A. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping and plugging utility services affected by selective demolition. Disconnect and stub off. Notify affected utility company in advance and obtain approval before starting. B. Excavate, backfill and resurface areas outside property lines required for complete disconnecting of services and utilities. Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. C. Place markers acceptable to Owner, Architect and utility companies to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. D. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition operations. E. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied and used facilities or portions of, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. F. Coordinate disconnection and removal of selected equipment with appropriate utility companies prior to starting demolition. 52 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Limit dust and dirt dispersal to lowest practicable level. Use water misting for cutting, hammering, and other operations that might generate dust. Control water to prevent hazardous conditions, spread of pollutants, and damage of products to remain or be reused. Comply with governing regulation regarding environmental hazards. Notify Architect of possible exposure to harmful dusts and vapors, flammable or explosive materials, and other potential hazards. B. Provide local exhaust system to capture dust and dirt. Use tools with integral ventilation hoods connected to exhaust system. Exhaust air through HEPA filter system. Dispose of filters as contaminated material. 3.06 WORKMANSHIP A. Perform work in a manner that will sequentially and positively support work to be accomplished. Make cuts with power - driven equipment where feasible. Impact tools are not allowed without specific approval from Architect. B. Provide safe conditions for existing building, building occupants and workmen. Restore Work damaged by operations under this Contract to original conditions. C. Remove work carefully. Remove adjacent loose and cracked material caused by demolition work. Remove work to extent required to avoid unsightly transition and patched appearance. D. Exercise particular care in removing items at finished spaces. At no extra cost to Owner, repair damage to remaining surfaces caused by demolition. E. During demolition, wet down areas of demolition to prevent spread of dust. Contain and prevent spread of water and refuse to existing structure and spaces that are to remain. F. Make temporary and permanent service termination indicated, and required as a part of Project. 3.07 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Perform explorations and probes to determine protective measures required before proceeding with selective demolition and removal work. Give particular attention to shoring and bracing requirements and procedures to remove structural embedments to prevent damage to adjacent construction. B. Accomplish selective demolition to extent indicated. 1 Work neatly and carefully perform demolition to protect buildings from weather and structural damage. 2 Protect existing work to remain. 3 Keep work wetted down with water to prevent dust, but not in excess to cause other damage. C. Perforni selective demolition in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 53 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION D. Repair selective demolition performed in excess of that required at no cost to Owner. E. Burning of materials on site is prohibited. F. Leave site in a condition acceptable to Engineer. G. Determine full scope of demolition. Scheduled for selective demolition, but not limited to: 1. Openings for door and entrances between existing building and addition. H. Should hazardous materials be encountered, stop work in affected areas and notify Architect inunediately. 3.08 TRANSPORT OF DEBRIS A. Through finished spaces, use rubber tired carts with covering to minimize spread of dust. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove from site and properly dispose contaminated, vermin infested and dangerous materials encountered. B. Remove demolished building material. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements. Remove dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations, and properly dispose. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to starting work. D. Remove demolished materials, tools, and equipment upon completion. END OF SECTION 54 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE] SECTION 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. The conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions) and the General Requirements (sections of Division 1) are herby made part of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE A. The work of this section includes all labor, material, equipment and accessories for all cast -in -place concrete including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes as shown on the drawings or specified herein. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute references (latest editions) as follows: 1. ACI 117 "Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ". 2. ACI 201.2R "Guide to Durable Concrete ". 3. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Building ". 4. ACI 302.R "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction ". 5. ACI 304R "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete ". 6. ACI 305R "Hot Weather Concreting ". 7. ACI 306R "Cold Weather Concreting ". 8. ACI 306.1 "Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting ". 9. ACI 315 "ACI Detailing Manual ". 10. ACI 318 " Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ". 11. ACI 347R "Guide to Fonnwork for Concrete ". B. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: "Manual of Standard Practice ". C. American Society for Testing Materials: Latest editions of ASTM standards unless more stringent requirements are shown in the Contract Documents. 1.04 SU MITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provision of Division 1 for each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Product Data. C. Concrete Mix Design; 1. Submit mix designs for approval at least 14 days prior to placing concrete. Place no concrete until the mix designs have been reviewed and approved. 2. Include the following information in the mix design submittal: a. Method (per ACI 301) used to proportion the mix. b. Proportions and type of all materials. c. Fine /coarse aggregate gradation per ASTM C33. d. Water /cement ratio. e. Slump. f. Chloride ion content. g. Air content (ASTM C231 and C457). h. Compressive strength (3 and 28 days) (ASTM C39). i. Admixtures. 55 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE( j. Unit weight of concrete.. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following based on comprehensive testing of current materials. 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Admixtures. 4. Curing materials. 5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Epoxy joint filler. 10. Joint filler strips. 11. Repair materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified independent testing laboratory to perform testing and quality control during the construction. B. The Contractor shall cooperate with the testing laboratory and the Engineer and provide adequate space for safe storage of the test specimens. C. Refer to 3.12 below for specific required information. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish (Architectural) Concrete: Provide products when assembled produce smooth, continuous surfaces including plywood, metal, metal - framed plywood, Masonite, or other acceptable panel type materials. Provide materials of the proper thickness for stability, and the proper finish for a smooth, imprinted surface. Use sealant at form joints as necessary to obtain a continuous surface. Final surfaces shall be clean, flush, and without blemishes prior to any surface treatment. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish (Structural) Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable materials. Provide lumber dressed on at least two (2) edges and one (1) side for tight fit. C. Form Coatings; Provide commercial formulation form- coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Provide one of the following products: " Eucoslip" by Euclid Chemical Company; "Debond" form coating, by L &M Construction Chemicals; or "Nox Crete Form Release" by Nox Crete. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, assembled with clips. 56 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE' 1. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A615 /A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars. C. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A82 D. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. E. Reinforcement Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber - reinforced concrete brick or greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic - protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. F. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain -steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free from burrs. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Only one brand of cement shall be used. B. Fly -Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C., limited to 15% of cement by weight. C. Normal Weight aggregates ASTM C 33. D. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard natural sand conforming to ASTM C -33. E. Course aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33, and be graded in accordance with Table 2, with maximum aggregate size of 1 -1/2" for footings, 1" for slab on grade, 3/8" for masonry core fill or interior precast topping. Aggregate shall not contain shale or other material which will cause pop -outs. F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Air - Entaining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Provide air entrainment at all exterior concrete, exposed to freezing and thawing at a rate of 6% +/- 1% by volume. 1. Products: Provide on of th following or substitution: a. "Air Mix "; Euclid Chemical b. "Sika Aer"; Sika Corp. c. "Micro Air" or "MB -VR "; Master Builders d. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair"; W.R.Grace B. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A., no chloride ions. Use in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements., provide one of the following or substitution: a. "Eucon WR -75 "; Euclid Chemical Co. 57 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE! b. "Pozzolith 200N or 322N "; Master Builders. c. "WRDA w /Hycol "; W.R.Grace Co. C. Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. Use in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following substitutions: a. "Eucon Retarder 75 "; Euclid Chemical Co. b. " Pozzolith 100 XR or 300 -R "; Master Builders c. "Daratard 17 "; W.R.Grace D. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E., no chloride ions. Use in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or substitution: a. "Accelguard 80 "; Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Poxxutec 20 "; Master Builders c. "Daraset "; W.R.Grace Co. E. Water- Reducing and High Range: ASTM C 494, Type F. Use in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or substitution: a. "Eucon 37"; Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Rheobuild 1000"; Master Builders c. "WRDA -19 "; W.R.Grace F. Water - Reducing, High Range and Retarding: ASTM C 494, Type G. Use in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or substitution: a. "Eucon 537" Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Rheobuild 716"; Master Builders c. "Daracem 100 "; W.R.Grace 2.05 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene fihn or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. 2.06 RELATED MATERIALS A. Non - Shrink Grout: 58 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 1. "Euco N -S "; Euclid Chemical 2. "Sonogrout "; Sonneborn- Contech 3. "Master Flow 713 "; Master Builders B. Patching Grout: One part Portland cement to 1 or 1 -1/2 parts sand. C. Isolation Joint: 4 mil polyethylene film or 15 pound building paper. D Expansion Joint Filler; '/2 inch thickness, non - extruding resilient fibre/bituminous type conforming to ASTM D 1751 E. Saw cut control joints and conjuction joints in floor; Joint filler shall be MM -80 (by Metzger /McGuire). Primer as recommended by sealant supplier. F. Waterstops: PVC flat ribbed waterstop, 3/16" X 6" Model FR -6316 by BoMetals, Inc, Model R6 -316R by Vinylex Corp. or substitution. G. Continuous metal pour stops at concrete topping. 2.07 CONCRETE PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN MIXES: A. Concrete exposed to weather shall have the following properties: 1. Compressive strength at 28 days 4000 PSI 2. Max. water /cement ratio 0.45 3. Air Entrainment 5% to 7% 4 Aggregate:Fine =40% of aggregate volume, Course ( #4- 1 ") =60% of aggregate volume 5. Slump 4 inch maximum PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, FORMS A. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast - in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Conform to ACI 347. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. D. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement is required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 59 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE' A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars ", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herin specified. B. Clean reinforcement of materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain specified coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.03 JOINTS A. Isolation Joints in Slab -On- Ground; Construct isolation joints in slabs -on- ground at points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. B. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -On- Ground: Construct contraction joints in slab -on- ground to form panels with a maximum joint spacing of 3 times slab thickness at any area and in areas not exceeding 625 square feet. Use Soft-Cut saw shortly after pour (without dislodging aggregate), and carefully saw cut to a depth of 1/3 of the slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Provide steel forms for cast -in -place concrete work. B. Forms to be used in visible area shall be smooth, free of dents, protrusions, projections, irregularities, and imperfections. Use exterior grade plywood with Grade A face material, if Contractor elects to use wood forms. C. Clean re -used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return form to acceptable surface condition throughout the project to maintain consistently good standards. D. Coat contact surfaces of forms with specified form- coating compound before reinforcement is placed. E. Coat steel forms wit ha non - staining, rust - preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust stained formwork is not acceptable. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Pre - placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. B. Notify Engineer at least two days in advance of each major concrete pour. C. Placing Concrete Slabs: Just prior to placement, dampen all area of the base material. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits or construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed five feet. 60 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE D. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strikeoff using a highway straightedge. Use a bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. E. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE IN TEMPERATURE EXTREMES A. Hot Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist tha would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and herein specified. 1. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 2. Fog spray fonns, reinforcing steel and subgrade just before concrete is placed. During and after placement, provide fog spray over but not directly on concrete. B. Use water - reducing retarding admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions. C. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. D. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306. When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees, uniformly heat all mixing ingredients. Provide protection as required when overnight temperatures are expected to drop below 34 degrees. Do not use any materials that are frozen. Cover slabs and exposed concrete as required through below freezing temperature at all times. If I temperature drop below 26 degrees, reschedule placement until weather permits. E. Concrete shall be in mixer no more than the maximum specified. Trucks shall be ordered to return to the plant, with the load rejected if the concrete exceeds this condition. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISH A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to slab surfaces to receive trowel fmish. B. Levelness and Flatness: After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, don not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared. Consolidate surface by hand floating. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to unifonn, smooth, granular texture. 1. Construct the slab -on -grade floor according to the standards of ACI Committee "Guide for Concrete Floor Slab Construction" (ACI 302.1, latest edition) and ACI Committee 117 "Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials (ACI 117) ". a. Flatness F- number (floor curvature) FF =35 61 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETEL b. Levelness F- number (horizontal plane) FL =25 C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to slab surfaces to be exposed -to -view. D. Non -Slip Broom Finish: Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior sidewalks, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after trowel fmishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by browning with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before application. 3.08 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 1. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. B. Moisture Curing Methods: Moisture cure all concrete continuously for a minimum of 7 days. Cover with moisture -proof covering and seal all edges. Apply as soon as finishing is completed and commence curing as soon as possible without injuring concrete. Remove and wet concrete as often as required to keep damp for entire curing period, 24 hours a day. Cure continuously with no dryouts during this period, with care to prevent dryouts at pour edges. Replace entire sections where edges have curled or warped and /or excessive cracking occurs. 3.09 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting the weight of concrete, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F or 10 degrees C, for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. (Not Used) 3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Repair and Patch Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after of removal of forms, when acceptable by Engineer. It shall be up to the Engineer if inferior areas of the work shall be replaced rather than repaired: verify with the Engineer before proceeding. When area are to be replaced they shall be done so within the area up to the nearest control or expansion joint. B. Repair Areas: Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over (1/4 ") in any direction, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete surface. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. C. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement with standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding 62 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. D. Repair Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks spalls air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. E. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contains defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired remove and replace concrete. F. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Contractor shall test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high area. Test uniformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. G. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non - reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable conditions. H. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. Contractor shall provide traffic coating acceptable to the Engineer where grinding occurs in exposed to view surfaces, or highly visible areas. Provide test patches of grinding, and traffic topping if required in the judgment of the Engineer. I. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete as directed by the Engineer. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. J. Repair defective areas, except randon cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing wit hfresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel wit hat least (3/4 ") clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact wit h patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. K. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut -out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to (2 -1/2) parts fine aggregate passing a No.16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry -pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact 63 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE' dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. L. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Engineer for method and procedure 1 using specified epoxy adhesive mortar. M. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Engineer. 3.12 CONCRETE TESTING A. Contractor shall employ a qualified Independent Testing Agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. B Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive - strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials compressive breading strength, and type of break for both 7 and 28 day tests and additives to batch at site. C. The following Tests shall be performed: 1. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal- weight concrete; ASTM C173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below and when 80 degrees F. and above, and one test for each composite sample. 4. Compression Tests: a. Standard 6" diameter concrete compression test cylinders shall be prepared in the field by the Contractor in accordance with ASTM C31, and ASTM C172 and delivered to an independent testing laboratory for curing and testing in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. Submit test reports to the Engineer in duplicate. b. Make at least one set of test cylinders for each day's pour in excess of one cubic yard for each type of concrete. If a day's pour exceeds 25 cubic yards, make one set of cylinders for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. c. Each set of test cylinders shall consist of four cylinders. Keep there cylinders (laboratory cylinders) in a 60 degrees F. to 80 degrees F. temperature range at the jobsite and protect from freezing and moisture loss for a period of 24 to 48 hours. Then deliver to the laboratory, laboratory cure an test one cylinder at 7 64 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETEI days and two cylinders at 28 days respectively. Handle cylinders carefully to prevent damage. d. The fourth cylinder (field cylinder) shall be placed as near as possible to and protected and cured in the same manner as the in place concrete from which taken. Completely cure and deliver this cylinder to the laboratory for possible test at 56 days as directed by the Engineer. e. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive - strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. f. In case where samples have not been taken for testing as specified or the strength of the laboratory test cylinders for a particular portion of the structure fails to meet the requirements of ACI 318, Section 4.3, for evaluation of concrete strength the Engineer shall have the right to order compressive and flexural test specimens taken from the hardened concrete according to ASTM c42, load test according to ACI 318, Chapter 20 or such other tests as may be necessary to clearly establish the strength of the concrete and such test shall be paid by the Contractor. 65 04060 MORTAR SECTION 04060 MORTAR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Mortar for masonry. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 04090 — MASONRY ACCESSORIES 2 Section 04210 — CLAY MASONRY UNITS 3 Section 04220 — CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Reports: Design mix, in duplicate, to Architect no less than 15 days prior to use. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ services of an independent testing laboratory approved by Architect to design mortar mix conforming to properties of ASTM C 270, and for testing of mortar specified. B. Determine water retention, no less than 75 percent, and air content in accordance with ASTM C91, and compressive strength of mortar in accordance with ASTM C190. C. Mix mortar for testing in laboratory from representative samples of mortar materials and proportions to be used in construction. This shall establish standard for Project and be used as standard for duration of Project. Refer to Field Quality Control and ASTM C780. D. Make bond strength tests of samples before starting masonry work and as work progresses. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. Use same manufacturer, brand, and color for entire project unless otherwise specified, or approved in writing by Engineer. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, free from calcium sulfate. C. Aggregates: Clean washed, loose and damp, and conform to ASTM C144, and ASTM C 404 for grout. D. Water: Clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, organic materials, minerals, and salts. 2.02 Measuring and Mixing A. Ingredients of mortar, and grout; Portland Cement, Hydrated Lime, and aggregate, shall be completely dried and pre- blended off site. Sufficient 66 04060 MORTAR means of proportioning and properly and thoroughly mixing dry ingredients shall be maintained: 1 Keep a digital printout displaying proper proportions of each batch as a permanent record. Produce printout upon requested. 2 Deliver mortar to the jobsite in bulk sacks weighing no more than 3,000 pounds. Set pre- blended mortar on pallets and sufficiently cover to keep dry. 3 A dispensing silo may be used. Use a batch type mixer, ASTM C270 -6.3. Mix mortar for at least 3 minutes, but no more than 5 minutes with sufficient quantity of water to produce a workable consistency. 4 Mix mortar to attain bond strength of no less than 80 psi with masonry units specified. Conform to property specifications of ASTM C270. B. Type of mortar to be used is specified in respective Masonry Section. C. Grout, Masonry Core Fill: Specified in Section 03300. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ADJUSTING A. Re- tempering: Consistency of natural mortar may be adjusted to satisfaction of mason, providing mortar's performance criteria are met. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after mixing. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sample and test mortar in accordance with ASTM C780. Conduct mortar verification, sampling, and testing each day and during progresses of work for each type of mortar and each lot of 1,000 masonry units. Prepare and have Prism Tests performed if and as required by local authorities. B. Grout Tests: ASTM C1019 -89a - Sampling and Testing Grout. One sample set from each batch. Test one at 7 days and 2 at 28 days. END OF SECTION 67 04090 MASONRY ACCESSORIES SECTION 04090 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Masonry accessories. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 04060 — MORTAR 2 Section 04210 — CLAY MASONRY UNITS 3 Section 04220 — CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 4 Section 07200 — BUILDING INSULATION 5 Section 07620 — SHEETMETAL FLASHING & TRIM PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1 Dur- O -Wal, is specified, http://wvvw.dur-o-wal.com/Dur0Wal_main.html ; 2 Hohmann and Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, New York, http: / /www.h- b.com/ ; or 3 Approved substitutions. 2.02 MATERIALS Application Requirement Joint reinforcement, interior walls ASTM A 641, 0.10 ounce psf. Joint reinforcement, wire ties and anchors ASTM A 153 Class B02, 1.50 ounces psf. in exterior walls, in interior walls exposed to moist environment. Sheet metal ties and anchors completely ASTM A 525 Class G -60, 0.60 ounces psf. embedded in mortar or grout. Wire ties and anchors in interior walls ASTM A 641 Class 3, 0.80 ounces psf. Sheet metal ties and anchors in exterior ASTM A 153, Class B -2, 1.50 ounces psf. wall, and interior wall exposed to moist environment. A. Provide materials conforming to, unless otherwise specified: 1 Cold Drawn Steel for Concrete Reinforcement: ASTM A82. 2 Steel Plates and Bar Anchor Material: ASTM A36. 3 Sheet Metal: ASTM A366. B. Coating Requirements, ACI 530.1: 68 04090 MASONRY ACCESSORIES C. Wall Reinforcement, horizontal joints: 1. Weight Classification and wire size: a. Standard Weight: 9 gage side rods and 9 gage cross rods. b. Extra Heavy Weight: 3/16 inch side rods and 9 gage cross rods. c.Super Heavy Weight: 3/16 inch side rods and 3/16 inch cross rods] unless otherwise specified. 2. Width: Nominal width equal to full wall thickness, including veneer. 3. Exterior, load bearing single - wythe, and composite masonry walls: Truss type, DA3100, Standard Weight unless otherwise specified. 4. Interior partitions: Ladur type, DA3200, Standard Weight. 5. Corners: Furnish pre- fabricated corners and tees except where masonry contraction joints and expansion joints occur. Use for corners and intersections of masonry walls, including intersections of exterior walls with partitions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES IN MASONRY A. Wall Reinforcing, horizontal joints: Insert wall reinforcing at 16 inches on center. Overlap reinforcing 6 inches, run around corners, and extend into intersecting walls. Bend and overlap wires at wall ends or jambs. 69 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Complete erection of concrete masonry units (CMU) and related materials, includes, but not limited to: 1 Mortar, 2 Block and other masonry units, 3 Masonry reinforcement, 4 Miscellaneous bond beams and lintels, 5 Grouting of reinforced masonry walls. 6 Cleaning concrete unit masonry. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 01455 — SPECIAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS 2 Section 03300 — CAST -1N -PLACE CONCRETE 3 Section 04060 — MORTAR 4 Section 04090 — MASONRY ACCESSORIES 5 Section 05500 — METAL FABRICATIONS 6 Section 07200 — BUILDING INSULATION 7 Section 07900 — JOINT SEALANTS C. See Section 01230 — ALTERNATES, for description of work under this Section affected by alternates. 1.04 HANDLING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Handle, transport and store at job site in a manner that will avoid damage. B. Protect concrete masonry units from becoming wet prior to use. Cube units on pallets at manufacturing plant and delivered to job with waterproof covering. Units shall remain covered. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete masonry units (CMU): Modular dimensions, conforming to ASTM Specifications and modifications, and additional requirements indicated below: 1 Unless otherwise specified, provide Autoclave CMU. 2 Loadbearing Units: C90, Type I. 3 Hollow Non - Loadbearing Units: C129, Type I. 70 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 4 Normal weight aggregate: ASTM Spec. C33. Provide these units unless otherwise specified. 5 Fire rated units: Standard weight having equivalent thickness required to conform to rating indicated on Drawings. 6 Outside corners: Bull Nose concrete masonry units. 2.02 MORTAR A. Mortar proportions and mixing is specified in Section 04060. B. Type: Lay masonry in mortar of type specified below, unless otherwise noted: Kind of Masonry Mortar Type Load - bearing, and exterior: S Masonry other than above: N C. Mortar color: Natural. D. Grout and masonry core fill is specified in Section 03300. For quantities less than one cubic yard site mixing may be acceptable. Refer to paragraph below for grout mix proportions. E. Measure grout materials by volume method and mix. Conform to ASTM C476. Achieve grout slump of 8 inches to 9 inches. Attain a compressive strength of no less than 3,000 psi at 28 days. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYING UNIT MASONRY A. Lay masonry in straight, uniform courses, plumb and true to line and plane unless otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings. 1 Use face shell bedding with full coverage of face shells of hollow units, full bed for solid units. 2 Pattern as specified. 3 Lay insulated concrete masonry units with mortar at exterior and interior face shell only and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Insert insulating barriers as each course is laid. Install reinforcement as specified. 4 Lay outside corners with bull nose units, unless otherwise specified. B. Build in anchors, ties, plates, beams, lintels, flashing, and inserts which are in masonry work. 1 Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for installation of their work in order to build in work specified under other Sections of these Specifications, as work progresses. 71 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2 Do no cutting or drilling without coordination of other trades. C. Reinforce concrete block masonry work with horizontal wall reinforcing, starting at second course and at every second course in bearing walls, and every second course in non - bearing walls. 1 Bond facing units to backing with reinforcing and metal ties as specified. 2 Corners and end shall be formed by cutting, lapping, and bending to fit or by use of prefabricated corner units. Place reinforcing in the first and second bed joints above and below opening or recesses where possible. 3 Terminate reinforcing on each side of control joints. D. Fill solid with concrete or grout. 1 Two masonry courses under bearing plates. 2 Top 2 courses of bearing walls and under beam and lintel bearings. 3 Top course of block wall where compressible seal is shown. E. Cut masonry units with saws. Units shall be free of broken corners. Load shells and cross webs of hollow masonry units with mortar. Shove units in place so joints are completely filled without pointing. Facing material shall be free from mortar smears. F. Wetting of concrete units before laid is not permitted. G. Pattern: Running Bond unless otherwise specified. H. Construct bond beams as detailed. I. Install flashing: 1 Install wall flashing, thru -wall flashing, and flashing at head and sill of wall penetrations, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Install according to manufacturer's instructions. 2 Fill depressions, clean surfaces. Paint steel with asphaltic paint. Set in smooth mortar bed being sure to fully embed flashing on both bottom and top surfaces in the mortar joint to achieve full bonding. Lay against a smooth surface of masonry free from projections that might puncture flashing material. 3 Install continuous where possible, if not, lap joints no less than 6 inches and seal with mastic. Turn up ends of flashing into head joint at ends to form end dams. J. Weeps and weep locations specified in Section 04210. K. Masonry Cavity Walls: 1 Install reinforcing in CMU back -up wythe so that eyelets will be located on surface of installed insulation. Snap insulation to fit between wall reinforcing. After CMU back -up has become rigid and as veneer is being laid, press insulation boards finely against back -up, between wall ties. 72 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Stagger end joints between courses. Keep joints and abutments tight, Install pintles so that they hold insulation firmly against back -up wythe. 2 Install each insulation board into fresh beads of joint sealant laid onto both horizontal and vertical joints of insulation, so that gaps in joints and abutments are sealed completely. L. Keep air space behind veneer wythe clean of protrusions, mortar droppings and other foreign material so flashing and weep holes remain free of blockage. M. Keep cavity free of mortar droppings. 3.02 JOINTS A. Where fresh masonry joints join masonry that is partially set or totally set, clean exposed surface of set masonry to obtain best possible bond with new work. B. If it becomes necessary to stop off a horizontal run of masonry, step back 1/2 unit length in each course. Toothing is not permitted, except upon written approval of Architect. C. Where cutting of exposed units is necessary, cut with a motor - driven masonry saw. D. Exposed mortar head and bed joints in block walls shall have a thickness equal to the difference between actual dimension and nominal dimensions of unit, either in height or in length. 3.03 TOOLING, CLEANING, POINTING A. Strike joints flush where CMU is covered and where CMU is below grade. B. Tool joints in exposed interior and exterior CMU. 1. Unless otherwise specified, provide concave joints for weather tightness and appearance, tooled with a round bar tool slightly larger than the joint. C. After mortar has cured thoroughly, clean exposed masonry using a stiff brush and water. If stiff brushes and water do not suffice, clean masonry with cleaning materials and methods approved by masonry manufacturer. Cleaning shall not result in discoloration of masonry. D. At completion of work, point holes or defective mortar joints, and where necessary, cut out and repoint defective joints. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do Prism Tests when required by local codes. Distribute copies of tests to the Architect/Engineer. Construct prisms and test in accordance with the procedures described in TEK No. 22 by the National Concrete Masonry Association. B. Take set, 3 units, of CMU from manufacturing plant or from within waterproof covered pallets on truck and as selected by Architect. Test for 73 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY moisture content, absorption, strength, density, and compliance with ASTM C90. Test one set of each type of CMU from first shipment to job site. and from each 1,000 units delivered to job site. C. Owner will employ an Agency to provide Special Testing and Inspections during preparation of masonry wall prisms, sampling and placing of concrete unit masonry and veneers, placement of reinforcement, inspection of grout space prior to closing of cleanouts and during grouting operation. D. Bond Strength: ASTM C 1072 Standard for measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength. Construct and test one prism of 5 units for every 5,000 units laid. Construct and test prism in accordance with ASTM standard specified. E. Grout Tests: Specified in Section 04060. 3.05 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect facing material, sills and ledges, against staining and moisture intrusion. 1 Cover top of walls with non - staining waterproof coverings at end of day and when Work is not in progress at the wall. 2 Overhang at least 2 feet on each side of wall and anchor coverings securely. 3 When Work is resumed, clean off loose mortar from top surface. END OF SECTION 74 i - 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Structural steel and structural steel erection. B. Related Section: 1 Section 01455 — SPECIAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS 2 Section 03300 — CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication and erection drawings. Include infornation necessary for fabrication of component parts of structure. Indicate size and weight of members, type and location of shop and field connections, type, size and extent of welds and welding sequence when required. Use welding symbols adopted by American Welding Society. B. Shop Drawing approval will be for general conformance with design concept of Project and general compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Confirm and correlate dimensions at job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, satisfactory performance and coordination of work. C. Submit current copy of fabricator's approval and acceptance, by local Building Official, to perform welding and fabrication in fabricator's shop, therefore, not requiring Special Testing and Inspections to be performed on shop fabricated work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. B. Pay cost of tests and corrective measures, including additional and more complete testing, for work that does not meet requirements of Contract Documents. C. Work of this Section shall confornl to American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. D. Perform welding using personnel qualified according to Standard Qualification Procedure and in accordance with AWS D1. /1, both by the American Welding Society. Welds will be inspected by Agency unless fabricator is approved by Building Official. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Use care in storing, handling and erecting structural steel. Support steel 75 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL properly at to ensure that no piece will be bent, twisted or otherwise damaged. Correct damaged material to the approval of Architect/Engineer, before being erected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials free from defects impairing strength, durability, appearance, and of best commercial quality for purposes indicated. Structural properties shall be such to withstand safely strains and stresses to which they will be normally subjected. Materials include, but not limited to: 1. Structural Steel: a. Standard beams, channels and plates: ASTM A 36 and A 572. b. Wide Flange and S Shapes: ASTM A 992. 2. Hollow Section Steel (HSS): a. Rectangular: ASTM A500, Grade B, unless otherwise specified. b. Round: ASTM A500, Grade B, unless otherwise specified, and ASTM A53. B. High tensile bolts, nuts and washers: Conform to requirements of ASTM A325, unless otherwise indicated. C. Bolts: Conform to current requirements of American Standards Association for heavy hexagon structural bolts, ASA Standard B18.2.2. Install and tighten in accordance with American Institute of Steel Construction Specification for Structural Joints, using ASTM A325 unless otherwise indicated. D. Nut dimensions: Conform to current requirements of American Standards Association for heavy semi - finished hexagon nuts, ASA Standard B18.2.2. E. Circular washers: Flat and smooth with their normal dimensions, except washer thickness, conforming to current requirements of the American Standards Association, ASA B27.2. Washer size and thickness given shall conform to Table 1 of the Steel Construction Specifications for Structural Joints, using ASTM A325 unless otherwise indicated. F. Anchor bolts: ASTM A307 Low Carbon steel. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Execute work in accordance with Drawings, details and approved Shop Drawings. B. Provide bracing, blocking, cutting, fitting, drilling, tapping, welding and punching as may be required to complete work and to join work of others. Weld clip angles and plates to beams and punch holes for fastening work of other trades as shown on Drawings. C. Provide holes and connections for work of other trades shown and required to be fastened to steel furnished under this heading. Do not cut holes in members 76 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL unless shown on the drawings without permission in writing from the Architect /Engineer. D. Shearing and punching shall leave clean, true lines and surfaces. E. Welding and equipment shall conform to the American Institute of Steel Construction Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, current edition, and the Code for Welding in Building Construction as referred to. F. Before welding, clean surfaces of scale, rust, grease and paint and other foreign materials. Jointing shall be tight, flush in true planes. Weld shall be uniform in section, smoothness of welded metal, feathered edges without overlaps, freedom from porosity and clinkers and be of adequate strength and durability. G. Unless otherwise shown, welds indicated on the Drawings shall be shop welds. Grind off rough places of exposed welds. Grind welds smooth where shown on Drawings. H. Shop assemble base plates to columns. Assemble base plates true on contact surfaces. I. Holes in column base plates for anchor bolts shall be sufficient diameter to permit minor adjustment in position and alignment of the bases on the foundation. J. Provide continuous welds unless otherwise indicated. Welding tension members not permitted, unless specifically called for on Drawings. K. Provide shop cut holes wherever holes can be determined prior to fabrication. Provide holes required for connection of work of other trades. 2.03 FINISHING A. Shop paint, conform to one of the following: 1 Steel Structures Painting Council Specification 15 -68 Type One, Red Oxide. 2 Federal Specification TT- P -636C. Asphaltum base paints are not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Unless otherwise noted, erect steel in accordance with specification adopted by AISC and following requirements: 1 Erect steel plumb. Secure members temporarily with bracing and bolts to support dead load, wind and erection loads, until permanent connections have been completed. Do no final bolting until structure has been properly aligned. Maintain bracing in place until safety permits its removal. 77 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL 2 Bolt field connections, and weld shop connections, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3 Bolted connections shall have bolts with washers installed and tightened in accordance with American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications for Structural Joints. 4 Contact surfaces shall be free from dirt, oil, loose scale, burrs, pits, paint and other defects that would prevent solid seating of parts. 5 No cutting of sections, flanges, webs or angles, unless shown, shall be done without approval. If burning is permitted by engineer, secure Fire Department permit. 6 Erect structural steel as rapidly as progress of Work will permit. B. After erection and welding of steel, apply a field touch up coat of paint on welded connections and damaged areas where steel is exposed to view using same color and type of paint used on shop coat. Remove clay, mud, and other foreign materials from members. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will employ Agency to: 1 Provide Special Inspection of field welds and of shop welds unless fabricator is approved by Building Official. 2 Provide observation and testing of high - strength bolting operation and connections. B. Testing laboratory shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting tests, state in each report whether or not test specimens conform to requirements of Contract Documents, and specifically note deviations. C. Cooperate with and provide Agency access to Work. END OF SECTION 78 05400 COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Framing members, bracing, fasteners, and related accessories for light -gage, load - bearing metal elements. Include services and engineering for cold - formed metal framing systems and elements. On Drawings words STEEL STUDS, METAL STUDS, and STUDS may be used interchangeably for drywall and cold - formed metal framing. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 01455 — SPECIAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS 2 Section 05120 — STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and latest technical data. B. Shop Drawings: a. Furnish detailed drawings and material lists showing depth and gage designations, number, type, location, and spacing of studs and framing. Show strapping location, method of attachment to each stud, and anchorage at ends. Show type of splices, accessories, and details as may be required for proper installation. b. Indicate on Shop Drawings that cold - formed metal framing system was engineered and is certified by a Professional Engineer licensed in state where Project is located and that Shop Drawings were prepared under his or her direct supervision and certified. C. Structural calculations for member sizing and connections not otherwise detailed. D. Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineer and design framing systems in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute, ASTM Specifications for the Design of Cold - Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition. B. Welding: Conform to American Welding Society, AWS D1.3 - 1981, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. C. Conform to Minnesota State Building Code. D. Structural design, calculations and details shall be certified by a Professional Engineer licensed in state where Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturer's include: Clark Steel Framing Systems, Dale /Incor, 79 05400 COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING Dietrich Industries, Keene, Uniunast Inc., Wheeling, or US Steel. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Studs, joists and framing members: Type, size and gage shown on Drawings. B. Painted studs and joists; 12, 14, and 16 gage: Form from steel that corresponds to ASTM A570, Grade 50, yield of no less than 50,000 psi. C. Painted studs, joists, track, bridging, end closures, and accessories; 18 and 20 gage: Form from steel that corresponds to requirements of ASTM A611, Grade C, with a yield of no less than 33,000 psi. D. Studs, joist and accessories: Primed with rust - inhibitive paint conforming to performance requirements of TT- P -636C. E. Include accessories as required for complete job including continuous angles at steel beams. F. Strapping: 16 gage, 2 inches wide steel straps fastened to studs as recommended by manufacturer, if required. G. Bridging: Up to 10 feet height, one row equally spaced; over 10 feet high, no greater than 5 foot spacing. Size bridging per manufacturer's recommended. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. Fabricate prefabricated panels square with components attached in a manner as to prevent racking. B. Cut framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members securely in place until properly fastened. C. Install axially loaded studs in a manner that will assure that ends of the studs are positioned against inside track web, prior to stud and track attachment. D. Provide insulation equal to that specified elsewhere in double jamb studs and double header members which will not be accessible to insulation installer. E. Touch up field abrasions and welds after installation. F. Framing members, unless otherwise shown on Drawings: 1. Exterior walls: Studs, as indicated on Drawings, capable of resisting a wind load of no less than 20 psf in addition to wall dead load without exceeding a deflection of 1/360 times span. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install steel studs and framing, plumb and true. Install strapping, if required, and accessories as shown on Drawings, and required for proper installation. B. Runner tracks: Firmly fasten to supports and to studs to provide for imposed loads. 80 05400 COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING C. Frame openings as detailed and as recommended by manufacturer. D. Space studs 16 inches on centers unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. E. Provide plywood panels, diaphragm rated fiberboard, or diagonal steel strapping to brace walls against racking caused by wind. F. Make intersecting walls and partitions connection in accordance with manufacturer's reconunendations and these Specifications, whether load - bearing or not, to provide anchoring and stiffness required to withstand impact loads and applied loads from attached fixtures and furniture. G. Join members with welds. Wire joining of framing members not permitted. Fasten as per manufacturer's specifications. H. Make attachments of wall materials to studs with self - drilling screws or hardened screw -shank nails at fastener spacing no more than specified by applicable building code authority. I. Securely anchor top and bottom runner track to roof structure overhead and to floor and as shown on Drawings. J. Set studs squarely in top and bottom runner track with firm abutment against track webs. Align, plumb and securely fasten studs to flanges of both top and bottom runner track. K. Provide continuous uniform base support beneath load - bearing walls with steel studs and runner track. L. Attach horizontal steel strapping, when required, to both sides of studs before floor, roof or ceiling structure overhead is installed. Securely anchor ends of strapping to suitable restraining columns or walls. M. Incline diagonal steel strapping, when used, at an angle between 45 and 60 degrees from horizontal, extending from bottom of one stud to top of another stud. Position similar straps in both directions. N. Use splice or butt welds, securely anchored to a common structural element, at butt joints in the runner track. Splices are not pennitted in track over lintels, diaphragm sheathing, and diagonal bracing. O. Splices in load - bearing studs are not permitted. P. Make welded connections by resistance spot or projection welds, fillet welds or plug welds, and in accordance with latest recommended procedures and practices of the American Welding Society. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will employ an Agency to provide Special Inspection of field welds and connections. END OF SECTION 81 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Metal items manufactured to conventional details from standard shapes and plates, and conforming to specific requirements of Project. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 03300 — CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2 Section 04220 — CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 1.02 SITBIVIITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show work to be fabricated in appropriate scale. Include construction details, methods of attachment to other materials, finishes, dimensions, shop welds and grinding of welds, field assembly joints, and the like. B. Coordinate work with suppliers and various trades; obtain their approved Shop Drawing where necessary, or obtain necessary additional detail information regarding mounting conditions and other aspects of related work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to: 1 AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code -- Steel. 2 Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, handle, deliver and store at job site in a manner that will avoid damage or defonnation. Damaged material will be rejected. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Verify dimensions in field, as required, for pre -cut or prefabricated items. B. Examine job conditions and adjoining construction that may affect the acceptability of work. C. Build into Work items to be built into concrete, masonry, and carpentry, as Work progresses. PART 2 PRODUCTS 82 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials free from defects impairing strength, durability, appearance, and of best commercial quality for purposes indicated. Structural properties shall be such to safely withstand strains and stresses to which they will be normally subjected. Materials include, but not limited to: 1. Architectural, Miscellaneous Steel: Mild Steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36 and A 572. 3. Hollow Section Steel (HSS): a. Rectangular: ASTM A500, Grade B, unless otherwise specified. b. Round: ASTM A500, Grade B, unless otherwise specified, and ASTM A53. 4. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled, ASTM A611, Class 1. Hot rolled, ASTM A570. 5. Weathering Material: ASTM A588. 6. Cast Iron: ASTM A48. 7. Malleable Cast Iron: ASTM A47. 8. Fastenings: Bolts, welds, rivets, and other fastenings as required. 9. Anchor Bolts, Nuts: ASTM A307. 10. Carbon Steel: ASTM A -366 or A -569. 11. Aluminum angles and channels: 6063 -T52 Alloy meeting ASTM B221. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FABRICATION A. Weld permanent connections wherever possible using continuous welds and grind smooth where exposed. Straighten members after welding. B. Shop cut, drill, and fit wherever possible. Take field measurements before fabrication when required. C. Provide supporting members, fasteners, framing, hangers, bracing, brackets, straps, bolts, angles, required to set and connect work rigidly and properly to other construction. D. Engineer metal fabrication items, including, but not limited to, stairs, ladders, and railings. Comply with local codes and standards. 2.03 SHOP COATINGS A. Shop coatings include: 1 Primer: Standard with fabricator, gray color. 2 Galvanizing: Hot dip in accordance with ASTM Al23, 2 ounces per square foot. B. Remove mill scale, rust and foreign matter by wire brushing, scraping, sandblasting or flame cleaning. Remove grease and oil with solvent, and dust 83 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS and dirt with air blast or brush. C. Apply one shop coat of specified primer to ferrous metal products excepting those cast, galvanized, and to receive a fireproof coating. Provide primer for field touch up. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Anchor to masonry with expansion or toggle bolts where built in anchorage is not provided. Do not fasten to wood plugs set in masonry. B. Vertical members set into concrete or masonry: As shown. C. Bolts, screws and fasteners for field connections: Same material and finish as base material unless otherwise specified. D. Immediately after erection: Repaint field connections, weld burns, abraded surfaces. Scrape and wire brush to sound metal loose and scaling paint, spot prime. 3.02 ITEMS INCLUDED IN METAL FABRICATION A. This is a representative list of items, but not limited to those listed. Items listed are intended only as a guide, but shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for quantity and to include similar items. Thoroughly examine Drawings for items of metals fabrication. D. Lintels: As scheduled and fabricated from structural steel. Provide galvanized lintels when located in exterior walls. E. Anchor bolts to set in concrete and masonry. F. Frames: As detailed. END OF SECTION 84 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 6100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Lumber, plywood, nails, bolts, screws, framing anchors and other hardware, and items needed to perform rough carpentry for construction and required for complete and proper installation. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 03100 — CONCRETE FORMWORK 2 Section 07510 — BUILT -UP ROOFING 3 Section 09250 — GYPSUM BOARD 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Fabrication and installation for special trims, special details, and special connections. B. Quality Assurance, wood treatment: 1 Certified test reports showing performance characteristics and physical properties. 2 National Evaluation Report and code's Evaluation Services report. 1.03 QUALITY STANDARDS A. Grades specified are West Coast Lumberman's Association, Western Wood Products Association, and American Plywood Association. B. Identify treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, American Wood Preservers Institute Standards and AWPA Standards or another testing and inspecting agencies. C. American Forest and Paper Association (AF &PA), National Designs Specification — Allowable Stress Design. D. Grade Stamps: 1 Identify framing lumber by American Lumber Standard Committee accredited grade stamp, or other grade stamps requested by Architect /Engineer. 2 Identify plywood as to species, grade and glue type by stamp of APA — The Engineered Wood Association. 3 Identify other materials of this Section by appropriate stamp of approved agency. E. Wood treatment Quality Mark: Wood members shall bear an end tag or permanent ink stamp indicating: 1 Manufacturer's name. 85 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2 Treatment plant name and location. 3 Treatment product symbol. 4 Preservative retention level and data of treatment. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site and store in a safe area, out of traffic and up off ground surface. B. Identify framing lumber as to grades and store each grade separately from other grades. C. Protect materials with adequate waterproof outer wrapping. D. Use extreme care in off loading of lumber to prevent damage, splitting and breaking of materials. E. Stockpile materials sufficiently in advance of need to assure their availability in a timely manner for work. F. Make as many trips to job site as needed to deliver materials in a timely manner and ensure orderly progress of Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials in the quantities needed for work shown on Drawings, and unless otherwise specified meet or exceed specified standards of quality: 1. Dimension lumber: Kiln dried, having moisture content no greater than 19 percent. 2. Furring and Blocking: Hem -Fir No. 3 grade or better. 3. Plywood: a. Interior Use: Exposed 1 side: Douglas Fir A -D. Exposed 2 sides: Douglas Fir A -A. Not exposed: Douglas Fir C -D. b. Exterior Use: Exposed 1 side: Douglas Fir, ACX. Exposed 2 sides: Douglas Fir, AAX. Not exposed: Douglas Fir, CDX. 4. Roof wood and lumber; wood cants, sleepers, curbs blocking, and the like: Redwood, or preservative treated Southern Pine or Hemfir as specified below. Unless otherwise specified or detailed, provided no less than nominal 4 inches width by thickness equal to final insulation surface. B. Construction Hardware: 1. Steel items: a. Comply with ASTM A36. b. Use galvanized at exterior locations. 2. Fasteners: 86 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY a. Machine bolts: Comply with ASTM A307. b. Lag bolts: Comply with Federal Specification FF -B -561. c. Nails: i. Common unless otherwise noted. ii. Comply with Federal Specification FF -N -1. iii. Galvanized at exterior locations. iv. Stainless steel in preservative treated wood, unless otherwise specified. 3. Connectors and hangers: Simpson, USP Lumber Connectors, or approved substitution. Provide connector finishes specified: a. For untreated wood: G90 hot - dipped galvanized steel or better. b. For treated wood: Type 304 and Type 316 Stainless Steel. c. Verify connector and fastener compatibility with treated wood. Submit compatibility data to Architect for review. Provide fasteners of same material as connectors. 4. Screws for wood to steel framing: a. Plywood: 1 -15/16 inch Type S -12 Bugle Head, Pilot Point. b. Wood Trim: Type S or S -12 Trim Head. 2.03 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT A. Lumber AWPA C20, Plywood AWPA C27, and bear U.L. labels. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. Provide wood framing as detailed, where required, and in accordance with codes and regulations. Cut members to be square on bearing, and closely fitted. Accurately set members to required lines, level, plumb and true, and secure rigidly in place. Do not use shims for leveling. Fastenings shall be in accordance with recommendations of National Lumber Manufacturer's Association. Provide blocking where shown, and where required. B Lumber may be rejected for excessive knots, warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, and for improper cutting and fitting. 3.02 GENERAL FRAMING A. General: 1 In addition to framing operation normal to fabrication and erection indicated on Drawings, install wood blocking and backing required for work of other trades. 2 Set horizontal and sloped members with crown up. 87 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.03 BLOCKING A. Install to support finish materials, accessories, and hardware; to cut off concealed draft openings both vertical and horizontal; and between ceiling and floor areas. Provide fire retardant treated wood blocking in rated non- combustible partitions, and where noted. 3.05 FASTENING A. Nailing: 1 Use only common wire nails or spikes. 2 Do not split wood while nailing. Prebore as required. 3 Remove split members and provide new specified members. B. Bolting: 1 Drill holes 1/16 inch larger in diameter than the bolts being used. 2 Drill straight and true from one side only. 3 Provide washers under head and nut. C. Screws: 1. For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of threads, enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank. 3.06 ; ACK AND EDGE PRIMING A. To prevent penetration of moisture into material receiving finish, back and edge prime materials. Seal edges of plywood before put into place. 3.07 TREATED LUMBER AND PLYWOOD A. Use fire treated lumber and wood for: 1. Wood bucks and blocking. B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber and plywood. END OF SECTION 88 07270 FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Firestopping and smoke barrier sealing of floor and wall openings, and includes, but not limited to: 1 Openings in fire -rated floors and walls both empty and those accommodating penetrating items such as cables, conduits, pipes, ducts, and the like; 2 Intersection of floor to wall; 3 Intersection or top of wall below structure; and 4 Each floor level in vertical service shaft. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 04220 — CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2 Section 09250 — GYPSUM BOARD 3 Division 15 — MECHANICAL 4 Division 16 — ELECTRICAL 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Manufacturer's printed product data indicating product specifications, characteristics, performance and limiting criteria, and manufacturer's installation instructions for each type of firestop required by Project. B. Shop Drawings: Show material installation details including reinforcement, anchoring, fastening and supporting test reference. C. Applicator's Qualifications Statement: List past projects indicating required experience. D. Supplier's Qualifications Statement: List past projects indicating required experience. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by local building code and as tested by nationally accepted testing agency per ASTM E -814 or UL 1479 fire tests. Provide a minimum F rating of one hour but not less than fire resistance rating of assembly being penetrated. When T rating is required by code authority, base on measurement of temperature rise on penetrating items. Conduct fire test with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column. B. Applicator Qualifications: Provide proof of having successfully completed training conducted by manufacturer and be certified as having been manufacturer trained, or is approved by Factory Mutual Research in 89 07270 FIRESTOPPING accordance with Approval Standard FM 4991 - Firestopping Contractor. C. Supplier Qualifications: 1. No less than 3 years experience recommending Firestop Systems and qualified to train proper Firestop System installation. 2. Capable of providing technical support, field support, installation training qualifications, inventory control, in Firestop business for no less than 3 years. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original unopened containers, clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand, trade name, type, grade and nationally accepted testing agency label. B. Store material in clean, dry and ventilated location at a temperature between 49 degrees F and 90 degrees F. Follow manufacturer's instructions and protect from soiling, abuse, and moisture. C. Handle and dispose of per Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1 Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before commencing work. 2 Proceed with installation only after penetrations of substrate and supporting brackets have been installed. 3 Provide a dry environment or protection for materials that are affected by water. B. Environmental Conditions: 1 Provide adequate ventilation, including forced air ventilation if required by manufacturer. 2 Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame. 3 Conform to manufacturer's printed instructions for installation, and when applicable, curing in accordance with temperature and humidity. 4 Provide masking and drop cloth to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warrant that firestopping systems used meet firestopping requirements specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 90 07270 FIRESTOPPING A. Provide materials free of asbestos and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gas. Materials shall provide F and T ratings required, as tested per ASTM E -814 by an agency with governing building code NER Number Listing, and conform to applicable governing codes. B. Firestopping Seal Materials: 1. Firestop Sealant: a. FS 2000 Non -Sag and FS 2003 Self - Leveling, single component silicone sealant, by Dow Corning, b. Biotherm BFS -100 Non -Sag or BFS -200 Self - Leveling, single component silicone sealant, by Bio Fireshield, Inc., c. Fyre Putty ceramic fiber hard setting putty, by Carborundum, or d. CLK N/S and S/L Firestop Sealant, by Nelson Fire Stop Products. 2. Firestop Sealant, Intumescent: a. CP -25 N/S Non -Sag, CP -25 S/L Self - Leveling or CP -25 WB Water Base of Caulks; or MPP -1 Pads or MPS -2 Stixs of Moldable Putty, by 3M, b. Biostop 500 intumescent caulk, by Bio Fireshield, Inc., c. Flame Stop V caulk or putty and Flame Stop VP caulk, by Flame Stop, Inc., or d. FSP Firestop Putty, by Nelson Fire Stop Products. 3. Firestop Foam/Mortar /Sheet: a. FS 2001 two component foam silicone sealant, by Dow Corning, b. Novasit K -10 Low Density or K -2 Medium Density, single component mortar, by Bio Fireshield, Inc., c. CS -195 Composite Sheet, by 3M, or d. CMP Firestop Compound, by Nelson Fire Stop Products. 1 Firestop Pillows, Intumescent: By Firestopping supplier. 2 Firestop Strip, Intumescent: FS -195 Wrap Strip, by 3M or approved substitution. 3 Firestop Devices: By Firestopping supplier. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Provide miscellaneous fonning, damming and backing materials to control depth and flow of firestopping. Permanently install accessories provided or approved by firestopping manufacturer and approved by authority having jurisdiction. B. Permanent fonning, damming, and backing materials may include, but not limited to: 91 07270 FIRESTOPPING 1 Firesafing insulation, 2 Ceramic fiber, 3 Sealant used in combination with other forming /damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state, 4 Fire -rated formboard, 5 Joint fillers for joint sealants, and 6 Sheet metal. C. Safing Insulation: Semi -rigid, mineral fiber, board insulation manufactured form refractory fibers with thermosetting resin binders. Comply with ASTM C 612. Provide insulation with nominal density of 4.0 psf, and passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Thernafiber Safing Insulation, by US Gypsum Corporation. b. Cafco industries Ltd. c. Fibres Inc. or d. Approved substitution. 2. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel. D. Sleeves and collars: Galvanized or stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect and verify that surface condition of substrates have no defects and errors that would interfere with installation of firestopping materials. B. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing of defects and errors in workmanship. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Notify, immediately, Architect/Engineer and Owner's Site Representative if firestopping systems specified cannot meet requirements of Specifications. C. Start of installation of firestopping constitutes acceptance of surface and conditions of substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces and substrates to be in contact with firestop seal materials of dirt, oil, loose material and other foreign materials that may affect proper bond or installation of firestops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide primer as required which conforms to manufacturer's recommendations for various substrates and conditions. C. Do not apply firestops to surfaces previously painted or treated with sealer, curing compounds, water repellents or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required 92 07270 FIRESTOPPING in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Mask where necessary to protect adjoining surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with U.L. Classified system and manufacturer's instructions to provide required F and T ratings. B. Ensure that anchoring devices, back -up material, clips, supports and other materials used in actual fire test are installed. C. Install firestops with sufficient pressure to properly fill and seal openings to ensure effective smoke seal. D. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestopping material promptly as work progresses and upon completion. E. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic. F. Temporary Firestopping: Install Firestopping Pillows in temporary openings and penetrations thorough existing walls between existing spaces and new Work, and floors between existing spaces and new Work. G. Firestopping top of masonry partitions: Insert compressible filler between top of masonry and floor above. Apply firestopping sealant or filler to fill gap between top of wall and deck on both sides of partition. Install sealant or filler to depth required to maintain fire resistance rating of wall assembly, but in not less than 1/2 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine firestops to ensure proper installation and full compliance with this Specification. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspected by applicable Code authorities. C. Perform patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting and penetration by other trades. D. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this Specification. 3.05 CLEANING A. When fmished work will be visible, clean adjacent surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If visible in finished work, remove temporary dams after initial cure of firestops. B. Correct stains and discoloring of adjacent surfaces. Remove debris and excessive materials from site and leave work in neat and tidy condition. END OF SECTION 93 08110 HOLLOW METAL WORK SECTION: 08110 HOLLOW METAL WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Hollow metal frames. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 04220 — CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 2 Section 08710 — DOOR HARDWARE 3 Section 09250 — GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, indicate: 1 Door types, design, and dimensions. 2 Door construction details and methods of assembling. 3 Door frame types, details, and dimensions 4 Hardware and weatherstripping locations and installation. 5 Shapes of materials, anchorage and fastening methods. 6 Finish requirements. 7 Wall opening construction details. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to recommendations and specifications of Steel Door Institute (SDI), and American National Standards Institute (ANSI), unless otherwise specified. B. Obtain from hardware supplier hardware templates and hardware required for factory installation. C. Provide rated doors and frames bearing Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) label of proper classification. Indicate on door label applicable fire test rating for door furnished. Provide an Underwriters' Laboratories certificate of inspection indicating that construction of labeled doors conform to procedure of laboratories. Label requirements take precedence over conflicting details. Notify Architect of conflicts before fabrication. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames in suitable crating or packaging to prevent damage in transit and storage. Provide metal spreaders at bottom of frames to maintain true dimensions of door opening. B. At job site, store doors under cover in a dry area with doors set upright with 1/4 inch spacers between each doors. Keep doors at least 4 inches above ground. Remove wet cardboard or similar wrappings immediately. 94 08110 HOLLOW METAL WORK 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine existing job conditions and adjoining construction that may affect acceptability of this work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers who are members of SDI, their products conform to ANSI/SDI -100 specification and this Specification are acceptable. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Steel: Commercial quality, level; cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366 free of scale and surface defects. Commercial quality hot rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM A569 may be used at contractor's option for interior frames. Steel for galvanizing, provide steel geometrically suitable for galvanizing as specified in ASTM A384 and A385, and Zinc - Coated conforming with ASTM A525, A60 casting. Gages are as follows unless otherwise noted: 1. Frames: a. Interior: 16 gage, 14 gage when required for U.L. label. b. Exterior: 14 gage. 1 Sub -frames and stiffeners: 12 gage. 2 Miscellaneous trim: 16 gage. B. Finish: After fabrication, thoroughly clean, phosphate treat and dip or spray surfaces of door and frame with rust inhibiting primer. Air dry or bake on conforming to ANSI A224.1. C. Silencer: No. GJ -64 by Glynn- Johnson Corporation. Install after painting. Provide 3 bumpers on single door frames and 2 on pair of doors frames. Color gray. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Make hardware mortises and reinforcements according to templates. Provide hinge, lock, door holder and closer hardware reinforcements. Mortise and drill tap for hardware. Provide grooves and rabbets as required for weatherstripping and soundstripping. B. Pre - assemble material at factory in largest size units permitted for shipping and minimum assembly at job site. Verify location of splices with Architect and show on Shop Drawings. C. Tolerances: SDI -117, Manufacturing Tolerances - Standard Steel Doors and Frames, apply to shop fabricating of steel doors and frames. D. Provide proper UL labels as indicated on Drawings. Provide doors and frames of a rated assembly having equal rating label. 95 08110 HOLLOW METAL WORK 2.04 FRAMES A. Provide steel welded unit type frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions, interior glazed panels and other openings, where shown on Drawings. Thermally broken frames shall meet or exceed thermal performance of ASTM C -236 and SDI - 133 -79. B. Continuously arc weld joints and grind smooth. Miter frame comers and backside and grind smooth face side. Weld joints and stops at mullion, and frame member intersections. C. Provide fixed stops with removable stops on secure side at perimeter of glazed openings. D. Provide closed metal covers over hardware cutouts to prevent filling with mortar and plaster. E. Reinforcement and appurtenances, no less than: 1 Hinge reinforcement: 8 gage, 1-1/2 inch by 9 inch 2 Strike reinforcement: 14 gage, 1-1/2 inch by 3 inch 3 Closer and holder reinforcement: 12 gage 4 Angle floor clips: 12 gage. Use adjustable type at floor toppings. 5 Spreader channel: 16 gage. 6 If not specified: No less than 14 gage. F. Provide integral channel frames, sub - frames and stiffeners, anchored to structure, where indicated and where required for fastening and stiffening frames. G. Provide frames and sidelights of profiles and sizes shown on Drawings. H. Anchors in masonry walls: 1 No less than three 18 gage corrugated adjustable slip type frame anchors for standard height jamb. 2 Adjustable slip type frame anchors, 18 gage corrugated, 2'- 8" on center for jambs 8 foot and higher. 3 Non - removable anchors in labeled frames. I. Anchors at steel columns and concrete surfaces: Sub -frames or rough bucks of 12 gage steel anchors at 2'- 6" on center. Anchor metal frames through face of frame or stops, using countersunk screws. See details for variations of jamb installation. 2.05 FIRE DOORS AND RELATED FRAMES A. Door and frame assemblies: Conform to ASTM E -152, UL 10c, NFPA 252 or ANSI Standard A2.2. Identify assembly by labels of agency accepted by the authority having jurisdiction. 96 08110 HOLLOW METAL WORK 2.06 SHOP PAINTING A. Clean frames by degreasing process, followed by one coat rust- inhibitive primer equal to salt spray test, 5 percent solution, of 70 hours. Thoroughly prime surfaces, including under and inside removable stops. Allow no runs, smears, or bare spots. B. Provide no less than one gallon of primer for field touch up of splices, connections, welds and abrasions. C. Clean and special pre -wash galvanized metal units prior to applying special finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Securely fasten work in place, without twists, warps, bulges or other unsatisfactory defacing. Set plumb, level, square, and to proper elevation, true to line and eye. Set clips and anchors with piston driven fasteners equal to Ramset or approved drilled -in anchors. Fasten units and trim together with neat, uniform, and tight joints. B. As masonry units are being laid, install jamb anchors and fill jambs solid with mortar. Provide accurately cut temporary wood spreaders at mid- section of frames. C. Install sub -frame or rough bucks at steel columns and concrete surfaces. At steel columns use 5/16 inch diameter self - tapping metal screws and at concrete use 5/16 inch diameter expansion bolts. Install frame and anchor to sub -frame or rough buck with metal screws. Fill screw holes with a suitable metallic filler, sand smooth and prime. D. Where field mounted hardware is required, provide wood or other suitable filler to avoid drilling and tapping into mortar inside frames. E. Use oval head self - tapping screws for attachments including removable stops. Drill and tap in field for surface mounted closers, brackets, rim exit devices, door holders, and other surface hardware. At horizontal exterior surfaces, set screws with neoprene gaskets or set with caulking compound under screw head and wipe clean. F. Fill field splices with body putty and sand smooth. Exposed screw heads will not be accepted. G. After installation, touch up field splices, connections, welds, and abrasions with specified primer. 3.02 RATED DOORS A. Install doors conforming to: 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80, and UL 10c. END OF SECTION 97 SECTION 08210 Wood Doors SECTION: 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Factory finished wood doors and transom panels. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 08110 — HOLLOW METAL WORK 2 Section 08710 — DOOR HARDWARE 3 Section 08800 — GLASS & GLAZING 1.02 REFERENCES A. Conform to requirements of the following specifications and standards except as modified by this Specification. 1 ANSI A135.4, Basic hardboard 2 ANSI /HPVA, Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 3 ASTM E152, Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4 ASTM E413, Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. 5 AWI, Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. 6 NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows. 7 NFPA 252, Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. 8 UL 10b, UL 10c, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 9 Warnock- Hersey, Certification Listings for fire doors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Schedules and elevations indicating door sizes, construction, swing, label, undercut, and applicable hardware locations. Show dimension and detail openings for glass lights, louvers, and grilles. B. Samples: 1 Corner sections of doors, approximately 12 inches by 12 inches triangular cut, with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials and finish proposed for factory - finished doors. 2 Veneer samples of specified veneer with their standard finish colors for Architect's selection. Submit samples, in sets of 2 or more, illustrating possible range of variations in finish. Finish sample sets become criteria for evaluating color and finish appearance. 3 Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish specified. 98 SECTION 08210 Wood Doors 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), 8th Edition, Version 1.0, 2003, and AWI Brochure FLUSH DOORS, apply and by reference are part of Specifications. Quality grade: Custom or better, unless otherwise noted. B. Affix AWI Quality Grade Stamp to each panel edge. AWI Quality Grade Stamp shall display grade specified. C. Rated doors and panels assemblies: Conform to UL 10c, ASTM E152, WHI, and bear labels and listed for specified classification. Label requirements take precedent over conflicting details. Notify Architect of conflicts prior to fabricating work. D. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified with no less than 5 years documented experience. Submit AWI Pre - qualification Form. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer's Lifetime Warranty for interior wood doors. Submit, in duplicate, written warranties. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction, and the like. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, handle, transport and store at job site in a manner that will avoid damage or warping. Store doors flat on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated building. Seal door edges within 7 days of delivery when doors are stored or expected to be stored at the job site for more than one week. B. Store doors in space where doors are to be installed not less than 48 hours before hanging. C. Cover doors, to keep clean and avoid discoloration. Provide an opaque covering that does not permit light to penetrate and allows air circulation. D. Do not subject doors to extreme heat, and humid conditions. Store in a space where relative humidity is not less than 30 percent, and not more than 60 percent. E. Handle with clean gloves. Do not drag doors across one another, and across other surfaces. F. Store DFM doors dead stacked, and poly - wrapped allowing air circulation. G. Mark each door on top and bottom of top and bottom rails with opening number used on Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 99 SECTION 08210 Wood Doors A. Listed manufacturers conforming to AWI Quality Standards are acceptable: Aaron Carlson; Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Buell Door Company; Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division; Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.; and VT Industries Inc. 2.02 DOORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Flush Doors: 1. Face veneer: AMSI/NWWDA 1.S.1 face grade. a. No less than 1/50 inch thick, Red Oak, Plain sliced 2. Construction: Hot Press, 5 ply. 3. Face adhesive: Type 1 waterproof. 4. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted. 5. Cores: a. Particleboard: Meet or exceeding ANSI 208.1, Type I, Grade 1 -LD -2 b. Mineral: Noncombustible mineral composite with no less than 28 pounds per cubic foot density per ASTM C303. Meet requirements for specified rating and UL Label. Provide flame resistant blocking as required for hardware. No through bolting permitted for hardware attachment. 6. Edge Construction, fire rated: Provide intumescent seals concealed by outer stile matching face veneer, and laminated backing at hinge stiles. 7. Where vision panel or louver overall size exceeds 40 percent of area of face of doors, provide stile and rail construction as specified in AWI specifications. Stiles and rails, or portion of, shall not be less than 5 inches. 8. Provide rated and UL approved pair of doors without metal edges and metal astragals, and with labeled wood veneered lite beading. B. Vision Panels: Factory cutout as specified, and as required for rated doors. Provide glass stops of same wood as door veneer and same wood veneer wrapped metal as rated door veneer. Provide loose, tacked, stops on one face to permit job glazing. 2.03 FITTING AND HANGING A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI - WDHS -3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115W series standards, and hardware templates. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Factory fmish wood doors, and frames according to AWI Quality Standards, 8th Edition, Section 1500 Custom Grade. 100 SECTION 08210 Wood Doors B. Finish: AWI Finish System, Catalyzed Polyurethane, with Satin sheen, and partially filled pore effect. Apply stain, sealer, top coats, and additional coatings as designated, in separate and distinct operations individually applied. Handwipe stain into pores of wood. Manually applied sealers, topcoats, fillers, and wash coats, as well as other specified processes. 1 Stain: Standard with manufacturer. Color, to be selected by Architect. 2 Washcoat: Standard with manufacturer. 3 Filler: Standard with manufacturer. C. Prepare doors for hardware, fit to frame, and undercut prior to finishing. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges of doors to snatch faces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that frame opening conditions, opening sizes, and tolerances are acceptable. B. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb, and are out -of- tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Prepare door for hardware, hang and adjust prior to finishing. Install non - labeled and labeled doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, NFPA 80 and to Warnock- Hersey requirements. B. Trion Non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to no more than 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for locksets, latchsets, cylinders, and the like. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware specified. G. Machine Labeled Doors by a licensed machiner. H. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Diagonal Distortion, Warp: No more than 1/4 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 inch by 84 inch surface area. B. Vertical Distortion, Bow: No more than 1/4 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 inch by 84 inch surface area. C. Width Distortion, Cup: No more than 1/4 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 inch by 84 inch surface area. 101 SECTION 08210 Wood Doors 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 102 08215 BULLET RESISTANT WOOD DOOR BULLET RESISTANT WOOD DOOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE A. The publication below forms a part of this specification. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY UL 752 BULLET RESISTING EQUIPMENT 1 1th edition dated Sept. 5, 2005 1.2 DESIGN A. Through design, manufacturing technique and material application, door shall be of the "non- ricochet type ". This design is intended to permit the capture and retention of an attacking projectile lessening the potential of a random injury or lateral penetration. The ballistic capturing barrier shall be UL LISTED Bullet Resistant Composite manufactured by Armortex. PROTECTION LEVEL SHALL BE UL LEVEL 3 (Three) Units must be manufactured in strict accordance with specifications, design and details. Door shall be mortised at the factory for template hardware in accordance with the approved hardware schedule. Templates are to be provided to the door manufacturer by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, all drilling and taping shall be performed at the jobsite by the installing contractor. Where field mounted hardware is to be attached to the wood surface all anchors must be through bolted. No field alterations to the construction of the units fabricated under the acceptable standards shall be allowed unless approved by the manufacturer and the architect. All welds shall be in accordance with the requirements and standard practices of the American Welding Society. All exposed welds shall be ground flush and finished smooth. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 and the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. Submit for approval prior to fabrication, VERIFICATION OF UL LISTING OF BULLET RESISTANT COMPOSITE, catalog cuts, shop drawings, specifications, frame profiles, size, type and spacing of frame anchors, reinforcement size and locations, details of joints and connections, welding details and printed data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the contract documents. The provider of this door must be ISO 9001:2008 Certified by an accredited registrar and provide proof of such. Provide proof of possession of PRODUCT LIABILITY INSURANCE in an amount not less than five million U.S. dollars. Submit manufacturer's instructions for installation of the door and cleaning of the glazing material if present. Provide verification of compliance with ASTM E119 -00a One Hour Fire Rating from a recognized testing laboratory for the ballistic protection barrier. 1.4 WARRANTY A. All materials and workmanship shall be warranted against defects for a period of one (1) year from date of receipt at job site. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. The door to be model, size, etc. as indicated on the contract drawings; manufactured by Armortex, Schertz, Texas. Phone: (210) 661 -8306, (800) 880 -8306, Fax: (210) 661- 103 08215 BULLET RESISTANT WOOD DOOR 8308. If in compliance with all aspects of this specification products by these additional manufacturers may be acceptable: Eggers Industries 920 - 793 -1351 Algoma Hardwoods 920 - 487 -5221 Diebold, Inc. 800 - 999 -3600 2.2 DOOR A. Bullet resistant solid core wood door shall be of the "non- ricochet type" complete with unfinished face veneer. Door unit shall be supplied pre hung with a Continuous Gear Hinge on a steel frame. If bullet resistant transparent armor is required for door vision panels, they shall be standard products furnished by the door manufacturer and must be a UL Listed material of the same ballistic level as_the door assembly._All stiles and rail edges shall be solid wood of the veneer species, a minimum of 3/8" thick. 2.3 FRAME A. Existing frames will be reused. 2.4 FINISH A. Cold rolled steel is factory prime painted gray, the continuous hinge is clear anodized aluminum and the door is to be unfinished plain sliced red oak veneer. Field paint and finish in accordance with and as directed in the Finish Section 9 of these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the door shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 PROTECTION A. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurement caused in shipping or handling of the products are properly cleaned and touched up. Store the products in a dry heated location, covered and ventilated to protect them from damage. Repair damaged units prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as directed. 3.3 CLEANING A. Upon completion, clean units thoroughly; remove all smears and other unsightly marks. Clean any glazing products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. ** END OF SECTION ** 104 08220 BULLET RESISTANT HOLLOW METAL FIXED WINDOW SECTION 08220 BULLET RESISTANT HOLLOW METAL FIXED WINDOWS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE A. The publications listed below forms a part of this specification. 1. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY UL 752 1 lth Edition dated Sept 5, 2005 Standard for Bullet Resistant Equipment 2. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY 1.2 DESIGN A. Through design, manufacturing technique and material application, frames shall be of the "non- ricochet type ". This design is intended to permit the capture and retention of an attacking projectile lessening the potential of a random injury or lateral penetration. The capturing barrier shall be UL LISTED BULLET RESISTANT COMPOSITE manufactured by Armortex. PROTECTION LEVEL SHALL BE UL LEVEL 3 (Three) Frames shall be of a protection level equal to or greater than the glazing. Units must be manufactured in strict accordance with the specifications, design and details. No field alterations to the construction of the units fabricated under the acceptable standards shall be allowed unless approved by the manufacturer and the architect. All welds shall be in accordance with the requirements and standard practices of the American Welding Society. All exposed welds shall be ground flush and finished smooth. Standard manufacturing tolerances shall be +/- 1/16" for frame opening, diagonal dimensions of frame, overall frame width, height, depth, etc. Aluminum or aluminum clad units are not acceptable. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1 and the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. Submit for approval prior to fabrication: VERIFICATION OF UL LISTING OF BULLET RESISTANT COMPOSITE, catalog cuts, shop drawings, specifications, frame profiles, size, type and spacing of frame anchors, reinforcement size and locations, details of joints and connections, welding details and printed data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the contract documents. The provider of this window must be ISO 9001:2008 Certified by an accredited registrar and provide proof of such. Provide proof of possession of PRODUCT LIABILITY INSURANCE in an amount not less than five million U.S. dollars. 1.4 WARRANTY A. All materials and workmanship shall be warranted against defects for a period of one (1) year from date of receipt at job site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMES 105 08220 BULLET RESISTANT HOLLOW METAL FIXED WINDOW A. Bullet Resistant Frames and glazing assemblies shall be manufactured by Armortex of Schertz, Texas. Phone: 210 -661 -8306, 800 - 880 -8306, Fax: 210- 661 -8308. B. If in compliance with all aspects of this specification, products by these additional manufacturers may be acceptable: 1. Diebold, Inc. 800 - 999 -3600 2. Ross Engineering 703 - 971 -2442 3. Norshield Security Products 334 - 281 -8440 C. Frames shall be a protection level equal to or greater than the glazing. Frame modules shall be of a "non ricochet type" design, constructed of brake formed commercial grade cold rolled 16 ga. steel ((substitute 16 ga. stainless steel in Lieu of 16 ga. cold rolled steel)) lined with UL LISTED BULLET RESISTANT ARMORTEX® COMPOSITE. Frames of a protection level 4 and higher shall be lined with HI Hard Anti ballistic steel of the appropriate level. Steel shall be free of scale, pitting, coil breaks and finish work shall be neat and free of defects. Corners shall be continuously welded the full length of the intersection. Knocked down and mechanical joints are unacceptable. Frame modules shall be capable of being joined with other frame modules to form a continuous hardline. Replacement of glazing shall be from the secure side of the window or wall unit and will not require the removal of the frame from the opening. 2.2 GLAZING A. The glazing must be UL Listed Level 3 (Three) laminated glass. clad polycarbonate. 2.3 FINISH A. Cold rolled steel is to be factory prime painted gray. Field paint and finish in accordance with and as directed in the Finish Section 9 of these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set frames and glaze in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Repair damaged units prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new units as directed by the architect. 3.2 PROTECTION A. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping and handling of the product are touched up. Properly store all the frames, glazing material etc. in a dry location and covered to protect them from damage before and after installation. 3.3 CLEANING A. Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of frames and glazing products thoroughly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks. 106 08220 BULLET RESISTANT HOLLOW METAL FIXED WINDOW ** END OF SECTION ** 107 08710 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Material, and related service necessary to furnish finish hardware indicated on Drawings, or specified and includes: 1 Furnish door hardware for hollow metal, wood and aluminum doors specified herein, listed in hardware schedule, and required by Drawings. 2 Cylinders for Aluminum Doors. 3 Thresholds and Weather - stripping, Aluminum frame seals to be provided by aluminum door supplier. 4 Electro - Mechanical Devices. 5 Access Control components and or systems specified within this section. B. Furnish UL listed hardware for all labeled and 20 min. openings in conformance with the requirements for the class of opening scheduled. Underwriters' requirements shall have precedence over specification where conflicts exist. C. Work shall be in accordance with applicable state and local building codes. Code requirements shall have precedence over this specification where conflicts exist. D. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and is required for the intended service, such omission, error or other discrepancy should be directed to the Architect prior to the bid date for clarification by addendum. Otherwise furnish such items in the type and quantity established by this specification for the appropriate service intended. E. Related Sections: 1 Section 08110 — HOLLOW METAL WORK 2 Section 08210 — WOOD DOORS 3 Division 16 — ELECTRICAL 1.02 REFERENCES A. Publications of agencies and organizations listed below form a part of this specification section to the extent referenced. 1 BMHA - Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware. 2 NFPA 80 - Standards for Fire Doors and Windows. 3 NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 4 UL - Building Material Directory. 5 DHI - Door and Hardware Institute. 6 WHI - Warnock Hersey 7 IBC 2006 - International Building Code 2006 Edition, as amended by local 108 08710 DOOR HARDWARE building code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Within 10 days after award of contract, submit detailed hardware schedule in quantities specified. B. Schedule format shall be consistent with recommendations for a vertical format as set forth in the Door & Hardware Institute's (DHI) publication "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule ". Hardware sets shall be consolidated to group multiple door openings which share similar hardware requirements. Schedule shall include the following information: 1. Door number, location, size, handing, and rating. 2. Door and frame material, handing. 3. Degree of swing. 4. Manufacturer. 5. Product name and catalog number. 6. Function, type and style. 7. Size and finish of each item. 8. Mounting heights. 9. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, etc. 10. Numerical door index, indicating the hardware set / group number for each door. C. When universal type door closers are to be provided, the schedule shall indicate the application method to be used for installation at each door: (regular arm, parallel arm, or top jamb). D. Schedule will be prepared under the direct supervision of a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) employed by the hardware distributor. The hardware schedule shall be signed and embossed with the DHI certification seal of the supervising AHC. The supervising AHC shall attend any meetings related to the project when requested by the architect. E. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to the details and surrounding conditions. F. Review drawings from related trades as required to verify compatibility with specified hardware. Indicate unsuitable or in compatible items, and proposed substitutions in the hardware schedule. G. Provide documentation for all hardware to be furnished on labeled fire doors indicating compliance with positive pressure fire testing UL 10C. H. Furnish manufacturers' catalog data for each item of hardware in quantities as required by Division 1 - General Conditions. I. Submit a sample of each type of hardware requested by the architect. Samples shall be of the same finish, style, and function as specified herein. Tag each sample with its 109 08710 DOOR HARDWARE permanent location so that it may be used in the final work. J. Furnish with first submittal, a list of required lead times for all hardware items. K. After final approved schedule is returned, transmit corrected copies for distribution and field use in quantities as required by Division 1 - General Conditions. L. Furnish approved hardware schedules, template lists, and pertinent templates as requested by related trades. M. Furnish necessary diagrams, schematics, voltage and amperage requirements for all electromechanical devices or systems as required by related trades. N. After receipt of approved hardware schedule, Hardware supplier shall initiate a meeting including the owner's representative to determine keying requirements. Upon completion of the initial key meeting, hardware supplier shall prepare a proposed key schedule with symbols and abbreviations as set forth in the door and hardware institute's publication "Keying Procedures, Systems, and Nomenclature ". Submit copies of owner approved key schedule for review and field use in quantities as required by Division 1 - General Conditions. Door Hardware 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of function and quality. Similar items by approved manufacturers that are equal in design, function, and quality, may be considered for prior approval of the architect, provided the required data and physical samples are submitted for approval as set forth in Division One General Requirements. B. Obtain each type of hardware (hinges, latch & locksets, exit devices, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. C. Hardware supplier shall be factory trained and certified by the manufacture to provide and support computer managed locks and system components. D. Installation of hardware shall be installed or directly supervised and inspected by a skilled installer certified by the manufacturer of locksets, door closers, and exit devices used on the project, or with not less than 3 years experience in successful completion of projects similar in size and scope. E. Provide hardware for labeled fire doors, which complies with positive pressure fire testing UL 10C. F. Comply with applicable provisions of the standards referenced within section 1.4 of this specification. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Hardware supplier shall deliver hardware to the job site unless otherwise specified. B. Deliver hardware in manufacturers' original cartons clearly marked with set and door number. C. Coordinate with contractor prior to hardware delivery and recommend secure storage and protection against loss and damage at job site. 110 08710 DOOR HARDWARE D. Receive hardware and provide secure and proper protection of all hardware items to avoid delays caused by lost or damaged hardware. Contractor shall report shortages to the Architect and hardware supplier immediately after receipt of material at the job site. E. Coordinate with related trades under the direction of the contractor for delivery of hardware items necessary for factory installation. 1.06 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING A. Schedule a hardware pre - installation meeting on site to review and discuss the installation of continuous hinges, locksets, door closers, exit devices, overhead stops, and electromechanical door hardware. B. Meeting attendees shall be notified 7 days in advance and shall include: Architect, Contractor, Door Hardware Installers (including low voltage hardware), Manufacturers representatives for above hardware items, and any other effected subcontractors or suppliers. D. All attendees shall be prepared to distribute installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates, and physical hardware samples. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Hardware items: Warranty against defects in material and workmanship. B. Repair, replace, or otherwise correct deficient materials and workmanship without additional cost to owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FASTENERS A. Exposed fasteners: Phillips head or as otherwise specified, and shall match the finish of the adjacent hardware. Fasteners exposed to weather shall be non - ferrous or stainless steel. Furnish correct fasteners to accommodate surrounding conditions. B. Where torx tamper resistant fasteners have been specified for a specific hardware group, provide torx head fasteners with center pin on exposed fasteners. C. Coordinate required reinforcements for doors and frames. Seek approval of the architect prior to furnishing through- bolts. Furnish through -bolts as required for materials not readily reinforced. 2.02 BUTT HINGES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives Stanley Hager Standard Weight, Plain Bearing 5PB1 F179 1279 Standard Weight, Ball Bearing 5BB1 BB179 BB1279 Standard Weight, Ball Bearing, Non- 5BB1 FBB19 BB1191 Ferrous 1 Heavy Weight, Ball Bearing 5BB1H FBB16 BB1168 111 08710 DOOR HARDWARE W 8 Heavy Weight, Ball Bearing, Non- 5BB 1 H FBB19 BB 1199 Ferrous W 9 B. Unless otherwise specified, furnish the following hinge quantities for each door leaf. 1 3 hinges for doors up to 90 inches. 2 One additional hinge for every 30 inch on doors over 90 inches. 3 4 hinges for Dutch door applications. C Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinge weight and type as follows: 1 Standard weight: Plain bearing hinge 5PB1 for interior openings through 36 inches wide without a door closer. 2 Standard weight: Ball bearing hinge 5BB1 for interior opening over 36 through 40 inches wide without a door closer, and for interior openings through 40 inches wide with a door closer. 3 Heavyweight: 4 ball bearing hinge 5BB1HW for interior openings over 40 inches wide, and for all vestibule doors. 4 Heavyweight: 4 ball bearing hinge 5BB1HWss for exterior openings unless otherwise listed in groups. D. Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinges for exterior doors, fabricated from brass, bronze, or stainless steel. Unless otherwise specified, hinges for interior doors may be fabricated from steel. E. Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinges in the following sizes: 5" x 5" 2 -1/4" thick doors 4 -1/2" x 4 -1/2" 1 -3/4" thick doors 3 -1/2" x 3 -1/2" 1 -3/8" thick doors F. Furnish hinges with sufficient width to accommodate trim and allow for 180- degree swing. G. Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinges with flat button tips with non - rising pins at interior doors, non - removable loose pins (NRP) at exterior and out - swinging interior doors. H. Unless otherwise specified, furnish hinges to template standards. 2.03 CONTINUOUS PIN AND BARREL HINGES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives Marker Stanley Edge Mount Pin & Barrel Stainless 700 Series 300 Series 650 Series Steel Continuous Hinge 112 08710 DOOR HARDWARE B. Continuous hinges: Full height pin and barrel type hinge providing full height door support up to 600 lbs. Edge mount, unless otherwise noted. C. Construct hinges of heavy -duty 14 -gauge material. The stainless internal pin shall have a diameter of 0.25 inch and exterior barrel diameter of 0.438 inch. D. Hinge: Non -handed with symmetrical template hole pattern and factory drilled. Hinge must accept a minimum of 21 fasteners on the door and 21 fasteners on the frame. E. Each knuckle to be 2 inch, including split nylon bearing at each separation for quiet, smooth, self - lubricating operation. F. Hinge to be able to carry Warnock Hersey Int. or UL for fire rated doors and frames up to 3 hours. G. Provide machine screws for doors which have been reinforced to accept machine screws. H. Fire label for doors and frames should be placed on the header and top rail of fire rated doors and frames. I. Provide adjusting screws equal to Ives "Adjust -a- Stud" for continuous hinges specified as 705. Adjustment to be able to correct frame fit problems up to 3/8 inch. 2.04 POWER TRANSFERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Von Duprin 1. Concealed 2 Wire EPT -2 2. Concealed 10 Wire EPT -10 B. Concealed power transfers shall be concealed in the door and frame when the door is closed. C. Concealed power transfers shall have a steel tube to protect wires from being cut. D. Concealed power transfers with spring tubes shall be rejected. E. Concealed power transfers shall be supplied with a mud box to house all terminations. 2.05 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUST PROOF STRIKES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives DoorControls Hager 1. Dust Proof Strike P2 80 280X 2. Auto Flush Bolt (Metal Door) FB31 P 842 292D 3. Auto Flush Bolt (Wood Door) FB41P 942 91D 4. Manual Flush Bolt FB458 780 282D 113 08710 DOOR HARDWARE B. Unless otherwise specified, provide 12" rods for manual flush bolts for door 7'6" or less, 24" top rods for doors over 7'6" to 8'6 ". C. Unless otherwise specified, provide doors over 8'6" with automatic top bolts. D. Provide automatic flush bolts where required to maintain egress requirements on pairs of doors. E. Provide flush bolts with non - locking dust proof strikes. 2.06 EXIT DEVICES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Von Duprin No Substitution 1. Wide Stile, Push Pad 98 / 99 Series 2. Narrow Stile, Push Pad 33 / 35 Series 3. Lever Trim 996 Series 4. Pull Trim 990 Series B. Obtain exit devices from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. C. Equip with a sound - dampening feature to reduce touch pad return noise. D. On full glass doors there shall be no exposed fasteners on the back of the mechanism visible through the glass. E. Provide with flush end caps to reduce potential damage from impact. F. Provide with dead - locking latch bolts to insure security. G. U.L. listed for accident hazard. Exit device for use on fire doors shall also be U.L. listed for fire exit hardware. H. Provide optional strikes, special length rods, and adapter plates to accommodate door and frame conditions. Provide narrow style series devices in lieu of wide stile series devices where optional strikes will not accommodate door and frame conditions. I. Coordinate with related trades to insure adequate clearance and reinforcement is provided in doors and frames. Provide thru bolts as required. J. Refer to hardware groups for exit device applications utilizing the option of: "less bottom rod and floor strike" (LBR) K. Provide with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on Project. L. Provide interchangeable core cylinders when used in conjunction with exit devices. Cylinder keyway shall match locksets furnished on this project. M. Provide cylinder keyed dogging (interchangeable core) for all non -fire rated exit devices. N. Provide glass bead kits as required to accommodate door conditions. Screws shall not 114 08710 DOOR HARDWARE be visible through full glass doors. O. Where specified, provide compatible keyed mullions with cylinder for pairs of doors. P. Provide reinforced crossbars for traditional style exit devices applied to doors over 36" wide. 2.07 LOCKSS AND LATCHES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Schlage . No Substitution Grade 1 Cylindrical ND Series RHO B. Cylinders: Provide Schlage, Falcon or Best 7 pin un- combinated cores for locks. C. Unless otherwise specified, all locks and latches to have: 1 2 -3/4" Backset. 2 1/2" minimum throw latchbolt. 3 One inch throw deadbolt. 4 6 pin cylinders. 5 ANSI A115.2 strikes. D. Provide guarded latch bolts for locksets, and latch bolts with sufficient throw to maintain fire rating of both single and paired door assemblies. E. Length of strike lip: Sufficient to clear surrounding trim. F. Provide wrought boxes for strikes at inactive doors, wood frames, and metal frames without integral mortar covers. 2.08 PULLS, PUSH BARS, PUSH/PULL PLATES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Bums Hager Ives 1. Straight Pull (1" dia., 10" ctc) 26C 4J 8103EZ -0 2. Straight Pull (3/4" dia., 8" ctc) 25B 3G 8102 -8 3. Offset Door Pull (1" dia., 10" ctc) 39C 12J 8190 -0 4. Pull / Push -Bar (1" dia., 10" ctc Pull) 422 x 26C 153 9103EZ -0 5. Offset Pull /Push -Bar (1" dia., 10" ctc Pull) 422 x 39C 157 9190 -0 6. Push Plate (.050 4 "X 16 ") 54 30S 4 x 16 8200 4 x 16 7. Push Plate (.050 6 "X 16 ") 56 30S6 x 16 8200 6" X 16" 8. Pull Plate (1" dia., 10" ctc - .050" x 4" x 16 ") 5426C 34J 4 x 16 B. Adjust dimensions of protection plates to accommodate stile and rail dimensions, lite and louver cutouts, and adjacent hardware. Where required by adjacent hardware, 115 08710 DOOR HARDWARE protection plates shall be factory drilled for cylinders or other mortised hardware. Push plates shall be beveled 4 sides and counter sunk. C. Where specified, provide surface mounted door edges. Edges shall butt to protective plates. Provide edges with cutouts as required adjacent hardware. D. Where possible, provide back -to -back, and concealed mounting for pulls and push bars. Push bar length shall be 3" less door width, or center of stile to center of stile for stile & rail or full glass doors. 2.09 COORDINATORS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives Door Controls Hager . 1. Bar Coordinator COR x FL 600 x Filler 297D x 297F 2. Mounting Bracket MB Series AB, C Series 297 Series B. Provide coordinators at all pairs of doors having automatic flush bolts and closers on the inactive leaf, and for pairs of doors having vertical rod/mortise exit device combinations with overlapping astragals. C. Provide appropriate filler bars, closer mounting brackets, carry bars, and special top latch preparations as required by adjacent hardware. 2.10 CLOSERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: LCN . No Substitution 4011 / 4111 EDA B. Obtain door closers from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. C. Provide extra heavy duty arm (EDA / HD) when closer is to be installed using parallel arm mounting. D. Use high strength cast iron cylinders, forged main arms, and 1 piece forged steel pistons. E. Utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of +120deg F to -30deg F without seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire -rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with standards UL10C. F. Unless otherwise specified, door closers shall have full covers and separate adjusting valves for sweeps, latch, and backcheck. • G. Provide closers for labeled doors. Provide closers with adjustable spring power. Size closers to insure exterior and fire rated doors will consistently close and latch doors under existing conditions. Size other door closers to allow for reduced opening force 116 08710 DOOR HARDWARE not to exceed 5 lbs. H. Install closers on the room side of corridor doors, stair side of stairways and interior side of exterior doors. I. Furnished complete with mounting brackets and cover plates as required by door and frame conditions, and by adjacent hardware. J. Pressure Relief Valve, PRV, are not acceptable. 2.11 KICK PLATES AND MOP PLATES A. Furnish protective plates as specified in hardware groups. B. Where specified, provide 10" kick plates, 36" armor plates, and 4" mop plates. Unless otherwise specified, metal protective plates shall be .050" thick; plastic plates shall be 1/8" thick. C. Protective plates: 2" less door width, or 1" less door width at pairs. Protective plates shall be beveled 4 sides and counter sunk. Protection plates over 16" shall not be provided for labeled doors unless specifically approved by door manufacturers listing. D. Where required by adjacent hardware, protection plates shall be factory drilled for cylinders or other mortised hardware. 2.12 FINISHES AND BASE MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise indicated in the hardware groups or herein, hardware finishes shall be applied over base metals as specified in the following finish schedule: All hardware finishes are to match existing. HARDWARE ITEM BHMA FINISH AND BASE MATERIAL 1. Butt Hinges: Exterior, or Non - Ferrous 630 (US32D) 2. Butt Hinges: Interior 652 (US26D) 3. Continuous Hinges 630 (US32D) 4. Flush Bolts 626 (US26D) 5. Exit Devices 626 (US26D) 6. Locks and Latches 626 (US26D) 7. Pulls and Push Plates/Bars 630 (US32D) 8. Coordinators 600 (Prime painted or mill alum.) 9. Closers 689 (Powder Coat Aluminum) 10. Protective Plates 630 (US32D) 11. Overhead Stops 630 (US32D) 12. Wall Stops and Holders 630 (US32D) 13. Thresholds 628 (Mill Aluminum) 14. Weather- strip, Sweeps Drip Caps Aluminum Anodized 117 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 15. Magnetic Holders Sprayed Aluminum 16. Miscellaneous 626 (US26D) 2.20 KEYING A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Schlage . Falcon . Best . 7 Pin K keyway 7 Pin K Keyway 7 Pin K Keyway B. Locks: Keyed by owner to existing Master Key System. C. Construction cores will be provided by Owner. D. Furnish a total of 2 keys per cylinder. Actual cut keys to be determined by owner. E. Deliver master keys and control keys by registered mail to Owner. Deliver change keys in set up key cabinet. Construction keys shall be delivered to the contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of hardware, installer shall examine door frame installation to insure frames have been set square and plumb. Installer shall examine doors, door frames, and adjacent wall, floor, and ceiling for conditions, which would adversely effect proper operation and function of door assemblies. Do not proceed with hardware installation until such deficiencies have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Before hardware installation, general contractor /construction manager shall coordinate a hardware installation seminar with a 1 week notice to all parties involved. The seminar is to be conducted on the installation of hardware, specifically of locksets, closers, exit devices, continuous hinges and overhead stops. Manufacturer's representative of the above products to present seminar. Seminar to be held at the job site and attended by installers of hardware (including low voltage hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training to include use of installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates and physical products samples. B. Install hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule and manufacturers instructions for installation and adjustment. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory- prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accord with industry standards. E. Drill appropriate size pilot holes for hardware attached to wood doors and frames. F. Shim doors as required to maintain proper operating clearance between door and frame. G. Unless otherwise specified, locate hardware in accordance with recornrnended locations for builders hardware for standard doors and frames as published by Door 118 08710 DOOR HARDWARE and Hardware Institute. H. Use only fasteners supplied by or approved by manufacturer for each respective item of hardware. I. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in finished work. J. Conceal push and pull bar fasteners where possible. Do not install through bolts through push plates. K. Install hardware on UL labeled openings in accordance with manufacturer's requirements to maintain the label. L. Apply self - adhesive gasketing on frame stop at head & latch side and on rabbet of frame at hinge side. M. Install hardware in accordance with supplemental "S" label instructions on fire rated openings. N. Install wall stops to contact lever handles or pulls. Do not mount wall stops on casework, or equipment. O. Where necessary, adjust doors and hardware as required to eliminate binding between strike and latchbolt. Doors should not rattle. P. Install door closers on corridor side of lobby doors, room side of corridor doors, and stair side of stairways. Q. Adjust spring power of door closers to insure exterior and fire rated doors will consistently close and latch doors under existing conditions. Adjust other door closers to insure opening force does not to exceed 5 lbs. R. Adjust "sweep ", "latch ", & "back check" valves on door closers to properly control door throughout opening and closing cycle. Adjust total closing speed as required to comply with applicable state and local building codes. S. Unless otherwise specified or detailed, install thresholds with the bevel in vertical alignment with the outside door face. Notch and closely fit thresholds to frame profile. Set thresholds in full bed of sealant. T. Compress sweep during installation as recommended by sweep manufacturer to facilitate a water resistant seal. U. Deliver to Owner 1 complete set of installation and adjustment instructions, and tools as furnished with hardware. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation has been completed, hardware supplier and manufacturer's representative for locksets, door closers, exit devices, and overhead stops shall check the project and verify compliance with installation instructions, adjustment of hardware items, and proper application according to approved hardware schedule. Hardware supplier shall submit a list of hardware that has not been installed correctly. B. After installation has been completed, hardware supplier and manufacturer's representative shall meet with Owner to explain functions, uses, adjustment, and 119 08710 DOOR HARDWARE maintenance of each item of hardware. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. At final completion, and when H.V.A.C. equipment is in operation, installer shall make final adjustments to and verify proper operation of door closers and other items of hardware. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer. B. Leave hardware clean and in good operation. Repair or replace hardware found to be disfigured, defective, or inoperative. 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Following schedule of hardware groups are intended to describe opening function. Hardware supplier is cautioned to refer to preamble of this specification for a complete description of materials and services to be furnished under this section. Area A Hallway Double door 2 °a Floor. Function: Read - in/Read -out Electrified lock -set. Delayed panic hardware with local alarm Active leaf 1 Keyed lockset with CYLINDER (VERIFY TYPE) 2 1-1/2 pair hinges 3 Closer 4. 10" Kick -plate 5 Wall stop with hold open. Fixed leaf 1 Mortised Head and Sill bolt 2 1-1/2 pair hinges 3 Wall stop with hold open Area B relocated door from Assistant Fire Chiefs Office. 1. Electrified /Keyed lock - set/storeroom function 2. 1-1/2 pair hinges 3. Closer 4. 10" Kick -plate 5. Wall stop Area C, & D, 1. Electrified /Keyed lock set /storeroom function Main Council Chamber entrance Area 1 Hallway Double door 1st Floor. Function: Read -in Electrified lock -set. Active leaf 120 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 1 Keyed lockset with CYLINDER (VERIFY TYPE) 2 1-1/2 pair hinges 3 Closer 4. 10" Kick -plate 5 Wall stop with hold open. Fixed leaf 4 Mortised Head and Sill bolt 5 1-1/2 pair hinges 6 Wall stop with hold open Utility Billing/Payment Office doors. Function: Read -in Electrified lock -set. 1. Latchguard at strike 2. Keyed lockset with cylinder 3. Balance of hardware by Bullet Resistant Door Manufacturer 121 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Gypsum board on metal framing and gypsum and cementitious backing units; and accessories and trim systems. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 05400 — COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 2 Section 06100 — ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stock pile Wallboard flat supported no less than 1 -1/2 inch off floor at spacing not to exceed 2 feet on center. Take care against loading beyond limits of floor. Leave in original wrappings or containers until ready for actual use. Protect wallboard from moisture. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide heat and ventilation as required to remove excess moisture. During and after gypsum work, maintain a temperature in space of not less than 60 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Products specified are United States Gypsum, unless otherwise specified. Materials by National Gypsum, Gold Bond Building Products, and Georgia - Pacific Corporation of equal quality is acceptable. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C1396 and: 1. Gypsum Wall - board: a. ASTM C36. b. 5/8 inch thick with tapered edges unless otherwise noted. c. Fire - resistant cores: Type X for rated wall assemblies and where shown on Drawings. 2. Gypsum Ceiling Board: a. ASTM C 1395. b. Fire - resistant cores: Type C: Provide for rated ceiling assemblies and where shown on Drawings. B. Fasteners: 1 Into conditions not noted: Type as reconunended by manufacturer. 2 Into steel framing up to 20 gage: Type S, Bugle Head screws conforming 122 09250 GYPSUM BOARD to ASTM C1002. 3 Into steel framing up to 14 gage: Type S -12, Bugle Head screws confonning to ASTM C954. 4 To secure CBU: Wafer Head, anti - corrosive coated screws, as recommended by manufacturer. C. Joint Materials, ASTM C475: Reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners; 1 Reinforcing Tape: Cross - fibered paper, feathered edges, random perforations. 2 Joint Compound: Taping Compound and Topping Compound, or All Purpose Joint Compound Plus 3 or equal. 3 Joint Treatment for Cement Board: 2 inch wide open mesh glass fiber tape acceptable to board manufacturer and tile manufacturer. 4 Joint Compound for wet and exterior locations: Chemical quick- setting type; USG Durabond 90 for first 2 coats, and vinyl type top coat specially formulated for finishing topping. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Conform to ASTM Standard Specification C 1047. 1. Studs and runners: Meet or exceed ASTM Standard C645 for non -load bearing steel studs and runners. Provide studs and runners of cold - rolled galvanized sheet steel meeting ASTM A446, Grade A, and a yield point of not less than 33,000 psi. 2. Metal framing: No less than 1-1/2 inch cold rolled channels. 3. Metal furring channel: a. Hat - shaped: ASTM C645. b. Z- channel: galvanized, ASTM A525 and A645. c. Resilient Channels: RC -1, corrosion resistant steel channel 4. Corner beads and casing beads, ASTM C840 and A525: a. Corner Reinforcement: 800 Series or equal. b. Casing Bead: 801 Series or equal. 5. Control Joint: No. 093, or equal. 6. Acoustical Sealant: Non - hardening, non - shrinking, non - skinning, formulated for acoustical use in conjunction with gypsum board. Conform to standard specification ASTM C 834. a. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: i. Pecora Corp.; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; or 123 09250 GYPSUM BOARD ii. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. b. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: i. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro - Series SC -170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant; ii. Pecora Corp.; BA -98; or iii. Treinco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. 7. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: a. Asphalt - Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), non - perforated. b. Foam Gasket: Adhesive - backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size 8. Tie wires: 16 gage galvanized, ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 9. Hanger Wire: 8 gage galvanized, ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and inspect surfaces and supports to which gypsum wallboard is to be applied. Remedy conditions that will jeopardize satisfactory finish prior to installation of drywall. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Carefully examine Drawings and provide a solid backing of metal studs 18 gage sheet metal for wall mounted specialties, hardware, equipment, cabinets, fixtures, and the like. Verify locations with other trades. B. Apply and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, manufacturer's instructions, and UL Design requirements for rated walls and partitions. Provide Level 4 finish unless otherwise specified: Level 0: No taping, finishing or accessories required. Level 1: Plenum and concealed areas. 1 Joints: Tape set in joint compound 2 Interior Angles: Tape set in joint compound 3 Surface: Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Surface free of excess joint compound. Level 2: Gypsum board back -up to ceramic tile. 1 Joints: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with joint knife, leaving thin coat of compound over tape. 124 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 2 Interior Angles: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with joint knife, leaving thin coat of compound over tape. 3 Accessories: Covered by one separate coat of joint compound. 4 Fasteners: Covered by one separate coat of joint compound. 5 Surface: Free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are not acceptable. Joint compound applied over body of tape at time if tape embedment will be considered a separate coat of joint compound and satisfy condition of this level Level 3: 1 Joints: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with joint knife, leaving thin coat of compound over tape, then cover with one separate coat of joint compound. 2 Interior Angles: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with joint knife, leaving thin coat of compound over tape, then cover with one separate coat of joint compound. 3 Accessories: Covered by 2 separate coats of joint compound. 4 Fasteners: Covered by 2 separate coats of joint compound. 5 Surface: Free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are not acceptable. Joint compound applied over body of tape at time if tape embedment will be considered a separate coat of joint compound and satisfy condition of this level Level 4: 1 Joints: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with joint knife, leaving thin coat of compound over tape, then cover with 2 separate coat of joint compound. 2 Interior Angles: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with joint knife, leaving thin coat of compound over tape, then cover with one separate coat of joint compound. 3 Accessories: Covered by one separate coat of joint compound, and another 3 separate coats of joint compound. 4 Fasteners: Covered by one separate coat of joint compound, and another 3 separate coats of joint compound. 5 Surface: Smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Level 5: 1 Joints: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with joint knife, leaving thin coat of compound over tape, then cover with 2 separate coats of joint compound. 2 Interior Angles: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with joint knife, leaving thin coat of compound over tape, then cover with 125 09250 GYPSUM BOARD one separate coat of joint compound. 3 Accessories: Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound. 4 Fasteners: Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound. 5 Surface: Apply to entire surface a thin skim coat of joint compound, or material manufactured especially for this purpose. Surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. C. Provide tight wallboard joints. Do not place butt ends against a tapered edge. Install metal trim at edges according to manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide snug fitting openings, small enough to be covered by plates and escutcheons, openings cut in wallboard for electrical outlets, plumbing, piping, and other penetrations. Cut both face and back paper for cutouts that are not made with a saw. E. Fasteners: Install fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch to edges. Apply pressure on wallboard adjacent to fasteners being driven to insure that wallboard will be secured tightly to framing member. Check for looseness of fasteners. Drive fastener with shank reasonably perpendicular to face of board. Drive screws with a power screwdriver as recommended by wallboard manufacturer. Drive fastener head below surface of paper without cutting paper. F. Partition Framing: Size and construct assembly components to meet local building code requirements and in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Provide no less than 20 gage steel stud framing or metal framing with Hat -shape furring channel. Space framing members no more than 16 inches on center. Provide framing that does not exceed L/360 deflection under design loads. G. Ceilings: Size and construct assembly components to meet local building code requirements and in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Provide no less than 20 gage steel stud framing or metal framing with Hat -shape furring channel. Space framing members no more than 16 inches on center. Provide framing that does not exceed L/360 deflection under design loads. Do not support light fixtures, ceiling grilles, diffusers and other components not part of gypsum board system by gypsum board or its framing system. 3.03 CONTROL JOINTS A. Isolate gypsum panel surfaces with control joints or other approved means when: 1 Partitions, furring and column fireproofing abut a structural element, except floor, and at dissimilar wall and ceiling materials. 2 Ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall material, dissimilar partition material, and other vertical penetration. 3. Construction changes in plane of a partition and in plane of a ceiling. 4. Partition and furring run exceeds 30 feet. 5. Ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction with perimeter relief, 126 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 30 feet without relief. 6. Exterior soffits exceed 30 feet in either direction. 7. Wings of L, U, and T shaped ceiling areas are joined. 8. Expansion joints and control joints occur in the exterior walls. B. Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. At less - than- ceiling height frames, provide control joints from both corners extending to the ceiling. If control joints are not used at opening corners, provide additional reinforcement at corners to distribute concentrated stresses. 3.04 ACCESSORY APPLICATION A. Joint System: Finish face panel joints and internal angles with a joint system installed according to manufacturer's directions. Spot exposed fasteners on face layers and finish corner bead, control joints and trim as required, with at least 3 coats of joint compound, feathered out onto panel faces and sand smooth. B. Corner Bead: Reinforce vertical and horizontal exterior corners with corner bead. Fasten with 9/16 inch rosin - coated staples or screws 9 inch on center on both flanges along entire length of bead. C. Casing Bead: Where assembly terminates against masonry or other dissimilar material, and where shown on Drawings apply over panel edge. Fasten with screws or 9/16 inch rosin - coated staples 12 inch on center. END OF SECTION 127 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Acoustical panels and tiles, and suspension systems. B. Related Section: 1 Section 09250 — GYPSUM BOARD 2 Division 15 — MECHANICAL 3 Division 16 — ELECTRICAL 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Installation layouts, reflected ceiling plan to no less than 1/8 inch equals one foot scale, coordinating penetrations and ceiling mounted items. Include: 1 Ceiling suspension members. 2 Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3 Ceiling mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and the like. B. Samples: Submit samples of acoustical and suspension materials to Architect for approval. Include Project and product identification of acoustical system and suspension material and system related to. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver ceiling materials to site when ready for installation. Store material for as short a period of time as possible. Remove cartons from pallets and stringers. B. Store ceiling material in environmental conditions as near as possible to those specified for occupancy. Standard conditions should be between 60 degrees to 85 degrees F with relative humidity no more than 75 percent. 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Stock: Furnish and leave with the Owner 2 cartons of each type of acoustical panels for future repair and remodeling. Cartons and bundles shall be new, unopened and labeled as to contents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acoustical Lay -in- Panels, ASTM E1264: Meet or exceed, unless otherwise specified: 1 Flame Spread, ASTM E 84: Class A. 2 Smoke Development: Not to exceed 50. 128 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 3 NRC, ASTM C 423: Meet that of specified panels. 4 CAC: Meet that of specified panels. 5 Light Reflectance, ASTM C 523: Meet that of specified panels. 6 Acoustical Panel types: As scheduled in Finish Schedule. B. Suspension System: Manufacture in Conformance to ASTM C 635 and as specified in Finish Schedule. C. Edge Molding: Match suspension system. D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized, soft temper steel wire conforming to ASTM A641- 71a, Class 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Lay -in Ceiling: 1. Install grid in accordance with ASTM C636, approved installation drawings, manufacturer's instructions. 2. Suspend system directly from building's structure. a. Where width of ducts and other construction in ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacing required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads. b. Connect hangers directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures c. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. d. Space hangers not more than 48 inches on center along main runners supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated, and no more than 8 inches from ends of each main runner. 3. Lay in acoustical panels after completion of other work in and above ceiling. 3.02 CLEANING A. Following installation, clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Clean and touchup minor finish damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove and provide new ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to Owner and Engineer's satisfaction. END OF SECTION 129 09680 CARPETING SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Carpeting and accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Name of proposed carpet installer, for approval, prior to execution of contract with installers. B. Copies of Independent Testing Laboratory's report on flame spread rating, smoke density factor and fuel contributory factor for carpet. C. Samples: Quality /color of each color and construction of carpet selected for Architect's approval. Sample size, 18 inches by 18 inches or larger. Attach copy of manufacturer's name and specification to each sample. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall meet or exceed requirements of IBC. B. Employ qualified, experienced professional carpet layers to install carpet. C. Submit for Engineer's approval descriptive data and samples for proposed carpet if by a manufacturer other than that specified. Carpet submitted for prior approval shall conform to properties and color as specified. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Exercise care during delivery, handling and storage to prevent damage. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply carpet to concrete that has not cured at least 90 days. B. Remove dust, oils, grease or other foreign matter from surfaces to be carpeted. Preheat building to no less than 65 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to installation with relative humidity between 35 percent and 50 percent. Keep temperature at same level night and day during installation. C. Maintain a temperature no less than [55] [65] degrees F after carpet is installed. D. Allow installation at least 24 hours to cure before subjecting it to traffic, moving of furniture and other heavy equipment, and the like. E. Ventilate area during and after installation of carpet for no less than 72 hours. Provide 100 percent fresh air, and exhausting to outdoors. Do not recirculate air. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Commercial grade Carpet as selected from Suppliers Catalog equal in quality to the carpet being removed. 130 09680 CARPETING B. Color and pattern: As selected from Manufacturer's standard color samples. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Waterproof and as recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Seaming: Chemically weld seams with Collins & Aikman No. 54 Seam Weld as recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Underlayment: Non - shrinking, water - resistant latex patching compound, formulated with Portland cement, fine aggregate and organic latex, and as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Floor sealer: Collins & Aikman C -36 Floor Primer or as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Base: Specified in Section [09650.] F. Transition Strips: Vinyl components by Johnsonite or equal. 1 Carpet to Tile Adaptor: CTA -XX -A. 2 Edge Guard: EG -XX. G. Miscellaneous Materials: Types of thread, nails, adhesives, and other accessory items recommended by carpet manufacturer and installer for conditions of installation and use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Close to traffic areas in which carpeting is to be laid, while work is in progress and until such time as recommended by installer. B. Fill holes, cracks, and depressions with underlayment. Eliminate protrusions. C. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, wax, paint, plaster and other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to dry. D. Do not install carpet until drywall is complete. E. Apply floor sealer to areas to receive carpet. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered. Wash, clean and rinse floor and allow to dry before spreading sealer. Allow sealer time to penetrate and dry before carpet installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight, true, and unfrayed. 1. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least traffic, with minimum number of seams. 2. Trim and neatly fit seams, and bond at time of installation with a seam adhesive recommended by carpet manufacturer. Apply adhesive to cut edge of carpet at level of carpet backing 131 09680 CARPETING 3. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from appearance of carpet installation and decrease carpet life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapping and peaked, and free of gaps. B. Lay carpet on floor with run of pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. Lay carpet on stairs with run of pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic. 1 Do not change run of pile in a room, and from one room to next room where carpet continuous through wall opening. 2 Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor, and to walls and other vertical surfaces leaving no gaps. 3 Securely bond carpet to substrate with adhesive. 4 Provide transition strips where carpet edges abut an adjacent floor of a different level than face of carpet. 5 Upholster exposed cut carpet edges. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. After installation is completed, remove spots with suitable spot remover. B. Vacuum carpet thoroughly using machine with a face - beater element. C. Protect carpet with non - staining cover during the remainder of the construction period, so that carpet will be in undamaged and unsoiled condition at the time of acceptance. D. Clean carpet prior to acceptance by Owner, using a method acceptable to carpet manufacturer and as required by type and construction of carpet and surface upon that carpet is installed. Perform cleaning using experienced carpet cleaning firm approved by the carpet manufacturer. E. Maintenance Materials: Deliver 5 percent overage of each carpet type to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged, paper wrapped, and identified. Furnish pieces no less than 3 square feet each, and not less than 8 inches wide. Properly dispose of smaller pieces. END OF SECTION 132 09900 PAINTING SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL, 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Field finishing of materials scheduled and specified for opaque or transparent finishes. B. Examine Construction Documents for various trades and become familiar with provisions regarding their painting. Paint fmish surfaces left unfinished by requirements of other Sections. C. See Section 01230 — ALTERNATES, for description of work under this Section affected by alternates. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Rating per ASTM D -523 on 60 degree gloss meter: 1 Flat: 0 to 15. 2 Eggshell: 5 to 25. 3 Satin: 20 to 35. 4 Semi- gloss: 30 to 65. 5 High: 65 and over. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Painting Systems: Submit 2 copies, for Architect's approval, descriptive data for paint materials and systems to be furnished if by a manufacturer other than specified. Indicate each specified system, locations of use and substitute system proposed. B. Colors: Architect will select colors from ICI Paints colors unless otherwise noted. However, Architect shall not be required to restrict his selection to such colors. If paint and colors being provided are not in color line of paint specified, submit for approval 8 inch by 10 inch color cards showing color and gloss in paint being furnished. Architect's approval of colors is required before painting commences. C. Current Material Safety Data Sheets. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Experienced with completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: Paint products shall meet federal, state and local EPA requirements for VOC's. C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from same manufacturer as finish coats. 133 09900 PAINTING D. Field samples: Provide full -coat finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate fmish of approved prepared samples. 1. Engineer will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 square feet of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from job - applied samples. 1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE & HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original containers, with seals unbroken and labels intact. Provide containers with manufacturer's name, label, and: 1 Product name. 2 Product description, generic classification or binder type. 3 Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4 Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5 Thinning instructions. 6 Application instructions. 7 Color name and number. 8 VOC content. B. Store materials in one protected area, maintaining a temperature between 45 degrees and 110 degrees F. Protect walls and floors of storage area. Remove oily rags and waste, from building every night. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings under the following prevailing conditions: 1 Air and surface temperatures are not below 50 degrees F and not above 90 degrees F. 2 Relative humidity is not above 85 percent and surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above dew point. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Furnish and turn over to Owner one labeled gallon of each type and final color 134 09900 PAINTING of paint used on Project. Furnish updated color schedule showing manufacturer, line or quality of paint, and color used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Unless otherwise specified, paint systems specified are products of ICI Paints, Commercial Paint Systems to establish standards of quality. Acceptable manufacturers include: 1 Benjamin Moore & Co. 2 Diamond Vogel 3 Pittsburgh Paints 4 Pratt and Lambert Co. 5 O'Brien Paint Co. 6 Sherwin Williams 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials are scheduled with paint systems in Part 3. Use materials of same manufacturer for each system unless otherwise approved by Engineer. B. Use only solvents recommended by paint manufacturer. C. Thinners: Do not thin or otherwise modify material except at manufacturer's direction. 1 Turpentine: Pure gum spirits of turpentine, ASTM D13. 2 Mineral Spirits: ASTM D13. D. Putty: Commercial grade, composed of linseed oil and Whiting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES A. Examine surfaces to be finished prior to commencing work. If woodwork, metal or other surfaces to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishes, notify Architect in writing or assume responsibility for and rectify unsatisfactory finish resulting. 3.02 PREPERATION A. Remove already installed hardware, plates, light fixtures, and the like, that is not to be painted. If removal is impractical, provide surface applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After painting is complete, reinstall items using worker skilled in trade involved. B. Clean and prepare surfaces before applying paint and surface treatments. Clean surfaces of substances that could impair bonding of various coatings. C. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from cleaning 135 09900 PAINTING process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Surface Preparation: 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. a. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Gypsum Board: Repair minor defects in gypsum board with spackle, sand rough areas. 3. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. Repair minor defects in plaster and concrete with patching plaster. a. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. c. clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated. Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with metal treatment wash coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas and shop - applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based 136 09900 PAINTING solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. E. Materials preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2 Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only in recommended limits. F. Tinting: Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or condition detrimental to durable paint film. 2 Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3 Spread materials on in even thorough coats without runs, sags, or other blemishes. 4 Lightly sand surfaces between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 5 Application procedures: Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. Spray: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. Roller - applied coats and spray - applied coats: Provide hiding equivalent to brush- applied coats. Do not double back over wet surfaces with spray or roller for purpose of building up film thickness greater than manufacturer's recommended film thickness. 6. Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer. B. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease before 137 09900 PAINTING applying materials. Where rust or scale is present, wire brush or sandpaper clean to bare metal before painting. C. Allow coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. Obtain Architect's approval of first coat before applying second coat. D. Do not paint exterior surfaces that are damp, during rainy weather and during frosty weather. E. Discard containers as they are emptied. Reuse is prohibited. F. Do not spot paint where portion of finish has been damaged or is unsatisfactory, repaint entire wall. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANUP A. Protect own work as well as adjacent work and materials by covering during process of fmishing. Remove paint and varnish spots from floors, glass and other surfaces when work is completed. Remove rubbish and accumulated materials, leaving premises in a clean, orderly condition. B. At end of each workday, remove from site and properly dispose of empty cans, rags, rubbish, and discarded paint materials. C. When painting is complete, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Do not scratch or damage finished surfaces. D. Provide WET PAINT signs to protect newly painted surfaces. E. At completion of construction of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.05 ITEMS REQUIRING PAINTING OR FINISH COATINGS A. Items to be included with those noted on Drawings or Specification, but not limited to: 1 Surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture. 2 Grilles and louvers that are not aluminum or specifically noted not to be painted. 3 Exposed structural and miscellaneous metals. 4 Items to be pruned, stained or sealed before installation B. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. 1. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all- service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. 138 09900 PAINTING e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory- primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory- primed finish for field painting. 3.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Ferrous Metals: 1 coat Acrylic 4020PF Devflex DTM Flat Interior /Exterior Primer & Finish ( Note 1) 2 coats Acrylic 6407 Dulux Fortis Premium Exterior Enamel Semi -Gloss B. Galvanized Metal: 1 coat Acrylic 3210 Prep & Prime Gripper Multi- Purpose Primer Sealer 2 coats Acrylic 6407 Dulux Fortis Premium Exterior Enamel Semi -Gloss 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Gypsum Board: 1 coat Acrylic 1020 Prep & Prime Wall & Woodwork Primer Sealer 2 coats Acrylic 1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Int. Wall and Trim Enamel Eggshell B. Concrete: 1 coat Acrylic 3030 Prep & Primer Bond Prep Pigmented Bonding Masonry Primer Sealer 2 coats Acrylic 1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Int. Wall and Trim Enamel Eggshell C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1 coat Acrylic 3100 Prep & Primer Gripper Blocksurfacer Primer Sealer 2 coats Acrylic 1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Int. Wall and Trim Enamel Eggshell D. Ferrous Metals: 1 coat Acrylic 4020PF Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Primer & Finish ( Note 1) 2 coats Acrylic 1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Int. Wall and Trim Enamel Semi -Gloss NOTES: 139 09900 PAINTING 1 This coat not required on previously painted or primed surfaces. However, touch up exposed material, and remove oxidized surfaces to bare material, clean and touch up. Apply second coat to achieve hiding and uniform luster if required. END OF SECTION 140 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work consists of furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of electrical work shown in the Contract Documents and specified in Division 16. 2. Commissioning - Mechanical systems on this project will be commissioned by an independent commissioning agent. Scope of electrical work includes, but is not limited to the following: a. Attending all commissioning meetings. b. Verifying electrical connections and operation of commissioned systems, including low voltage systems. c. Measuring, testing and documenting statuses of components within the scope of mechanical commissioning. 3. Demonstrating electrical systems to the Owner and commissioning agent. 4. Include all parts and labor which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. Such items include nuts, bolts, anchors, brackets, sleeves, offsets in conduit, fittings, relays, etc. 5. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 15 or Division 16 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor's responsibility to review Division 15 and Division 16 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. 6. Arrange with appropriate utility companies to provide temporary and permanent utility services as required and coordinate their installation with construction progress of this project. 7. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division's work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. 8. Pay all fees and costs charged by utility companies for utility services. 9. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. 10. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. 11. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by 141 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS enforcement authorities. B. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 16 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 16010 takes precedence. Section 16010 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the electrical work and applies to all electrical work of the Contract Documents. 2. Division 0 and I and Section 16010 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub - contracts relating to Division 16 work. Copy these documents to all Subcontractors receiving other Sections of Division 16. 3. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on Related Sections, this is done for Contractor's convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division's Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. C. Unit Prices: Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders D. Alternates: Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non - complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: National Electric Code State and Local Electrical Codes International Building Code International Fire Code Uniform Mechanical Code State and Local Building Codes and Ordinances State Industrial Commission Regulations State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations 142 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS State and Local Uniform Mechanical Codes State Elevator Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations Americans with Disabilities Act Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards State Board of Health NFPA 101 Life Safety Code State Energy Code D. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: A1A: American Insurance Association AIA: American Institute of Architects ANSI: American National Standards Institute ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials EPA: Environmental Protection Agency FM: Factory Mutual Insurance Association IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ICEA: International Cable Engineers Association NBS: National Bureau of Standards NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA: National Fire Protection Association NSC: National Safety Council UL: Underwriter's Laboratories 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The terms defined below apply to all work included in Division 16. 1. The work -as defined in the 1997 AIA Document A201: "The term 'Work' means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project." 2. Furnish -to obtain in new condition ready for installation into the work. 3. Install -to store, set in place, connect and place into operation into the work. 4. Provide -to furnish and install. 143 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 5. Connect -to bring service to the equipment and make final attachment including necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc. 6. Conduit - includes in addition to conduit, all fittings, pull boxes, hangers and other supports and accessories related to such conduit. 7. Concealed - hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces or buried. 8. Exposed: not installed underground nor concealed as defined above. 9. Building structure or building structural members - consists of steel columns, steel beams, steel joists (top chord and at panel points), concrete walls and concrete block walls. Metal decking, joist bridging and bottom chords of bar joists shall not be construed as building structure nor as a building structural member for the purpose of support. B. The drawing and specifications constitute the Contract Documents. Any item noted in the specification or shown on the drawings is included in the Contract Documents. C. All electrical details and drawings are diagrammatic, unless specifically noted. Field verify all dimensions and notify the Engineer of any conflicts of discrepancies, in writing, prior to installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use unspecified items, to the Engineer, no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using accepted substitutions. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not specified or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. Pay Request Cost Breakdown 1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a "Pay Request ". Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. 2. Submit cost breakdown on AIA document G703. Provide minimum breakdown as indicated below. Provide additional breakdown as required for clarity or requested by the Engineer. a. General Conditions. 144 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS b. Demolition. c. Conduit, fittings and boxes (rough -in materials). d. Primary Service Distribution Equipment. e. Secondary Service and Distribution Equipment. f Secondary Wire and Cable. g. Wiring Devices, Plates and Miscellaneous. h. Motor Control and Connections. i. Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Controls. j. Exterior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Controls. k. Fire Alarm System. 1. Communication Systems. m. Security Systems. C. Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division I. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub - contractor, manufacture, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross -out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer -One (1) copy. b. Architect -One (1) copy. c. General. Contractor - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O &M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer, with one of the following actions checked on the submittal stamp: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN- Indicates the Submittal appears to 145 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and /or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED - Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and /or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED- Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED- Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. 7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor's application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment: 16050 Surface Raceway 16050 Wire and Cable 16050 Wiring Devices and Coverplates 16050 Safety Switches 16500 Light Fixtures 16500 Lamps 16500 Ballasts 16535 Exit Signs 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. 1 146 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. 2. Do not dispose of any PCB containing materials. Disposal of all PCB containing materials will be the responsibility of the Owner. 1.6 PROTECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Conduits, pipes, ducts, lights, devices, etc., shown on the drawings as existing have been based on existing plans and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractors responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Mechanical and othcr trades for correlating inforniation and layout work so that it will coordinate with othcr trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Install all conduit, cable tray, busduct, equipment, etc. allowing proper code and maintenance clearances and to avoid blocking passageways and access panels. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 147 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4 " =1' -0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either on is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the drawings and specifications. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Refer to General Conditions and Requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (I) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specifically called for. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING & POWER SYSTEM A. See Division 1 for temporary electrical services. B. Use existing building distribution systems for construction power. C. Replace all receptacles, switched, coverplates, etc., damaged by any Contractor during the course of construction. D. Materials furnished for the temporary light and power system remain Contractors property. Remove when there is no longer any need for temporary light and power or when directed by the Architect. E. Electrical energy costs shall be paid by the Owner. 148 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate /schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2.Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. 3.No fire alarm systems are to remain inactive at the end of the work day. Assure that the fire alarm system is operational at the end of each work day. Coordinate with the Owner. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, instructions and current NECA standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the specifications, before or after installation. B. Excavation and Backfilling: 1. Provide all excavation and backfilling required to complete the installation of the electrical system. Conform with the provisions of Section 02200 Earthwork of these specifications for all work. 2. Bed all conduit and structures on a 6" thick compacted layer of granular material. Should unsatisfactory soil conditions be discovered, the Engineer /Architect will inspect the excavation and determine the necessary additional support required. 3. Backfill around conduit and structures by hand using coarse sand, pit run gravel or the native material if it is similar to the above. Remove all large stones, frozen lumps, perishable rubbish and excessive amounts of clay. Carefully compact this material in 6" layers to a depth of 8" above the conduit, cable or duet. . Compact to not less than 90% outside the building 149 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS and 95% within the building limits of maximum density given by ASTM D698 -70T (Standard Proctor Density). Architect /Engineer reserves the right to require soil compaction tests in any areas which do not appear to be compacted properly with the cost of the test paid by the Contractor. 4. Replace all existing surface improvements (i.e.,- street pavement, curbs, sidewalks, finish sodding, etc.) removed or damaged in the course of the work unless such improvements are to be reconstructed under the general contract. Make all necessary arrangements to perform such repairs, pay all costs in connection therewith and include them in the bid. C. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of electrical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for electrical raceway. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. D. Equipment Pads and Bases: 1. Provide minimum 4" high concrete pads for all floor mounted equipment. 2. Size pad to provide a minimum 2" overlap around perimeter of equipment. 3. Provide concrete bases for poles as indicated on the drawings. 4. Provide steel reinforcement as required for load or as indicated on the drawings. E. Painting: 1. Refinish all electrical equipment damaged during shipping and /or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. 2. Paint all new raceway systems in exposed finished areas to match existing SUROUNDING fmish. 3.4 RECORD DRAWINGS 150 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Provide record drawings in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions, Division I and this section. B. As work progresses, in a neat and legible manner, record the following information on the record set of plans: 1. Update the contract documents to show all modifications including but not limited to Addendums, Change Orders, approved Proposal Requests and Architect's Supplemental Instructions. Cut and paste original documents to the as -built set. 2. Indicate exact location and depth of underground feeders to panel boards, transformers, distribution panels, generators and motor control centers, complete from each end. Indicate the routing of the conduits as accurately as possible, showing elbows, sweeps, and turns. 3. Provide exact routing of outside underground feeders and services, showing dimensions from structural foundation walls or columns. Indicate depth and type of conduits. 4. Record exact location and elevation of underground conduits dedicated to technology systems including backbone fiber conduits, telephone conduits and cable TV conduits. Where spare underground conduits are terminated underground (i.e. property line), indicate exact dimensions from two different points of the foundation wall corner or structural columns. 5. Record changes to branch circuit numbers on the plan when they deviate from the circuit numbers shown on the Contract Documents. 6. Record the locations of the following devices: a. The Engineer will recommend withholding payment if as -built drawings are not being maintained on -site. b. Submit record drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Refer to Section 16196. B. Final Inspection: 1. A final inspection of the electrical systems will be required before the Contract can be closed out. Request a final inspection by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule an inspection and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. If the Engineer is requested to make a final inspection by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that inspection, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for his time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Inspection. 151 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3.6 CLEANUP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean electrical equipment and remove temporary identification. In case of dispute the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor. B. After tests have been made and accepted clean light fixtures, panels and other equipment installed by the Contractor, leaving the entire work area in a clean and complete working order. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instructions to Owner: 1. Fully lubricate, charge, fill, etc. all equipment, per manufacture's recommendation, prior to start-up. 2. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final inspection and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly. 3. Fully instruct the Owner's designated operating in the operation of each electrical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory trained personnel. 4. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 5. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed. B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: a. Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1) Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and /or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate rnarked to reflect the "as- built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2) Copies of manufacturer's warranties 3) Operating instruction for equipment. 152 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 4) Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5) Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6) Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7) Equipment parts list. 8) Settings /adjustments /calibrations For systems as required. 9) Local equipment suppliers /reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10) Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11) Sub - contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12) Refer to individual Sections in division 16 for additional requirements. 13) Test reports. b. Provide electronic copy as described in Article 16010 3.9 3.8 PROTECTION A. Cover openings and equipment, where set, to prevent obstruction to conduits, breakage, misuse, or disfigurement of equipment. Cover openings in equipment immediately upon uncrating or receipt at the job site and keep covered until permanent connection is made. B. Contractor is responsible for any damage to electrical equipment or materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. Keep all equipment clean materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. C. If a portion of the project is to be occupied by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion of the entire project make arrangements with the Owner to transfer responsibilities for protection and housekeeping. 3.9 PROJECT CLOSEOUT AND DOCUMENT TURNOVER A. Construction Documents CD's, Owner and Operation Manuals (O &M's), As- Builts, Specifications and other documents turned over at the completion of the projects shall be furnished to the Owner in both paper hard copy and digital Adobe PDF. 1. Owners and Operation Manuals a. 0 & M's shall be turned over by the Contractor. 153 16025 DEMOLITION SECTION 16025 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. Sections 16010 and all references contained therein form a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 SCOPE A. The Provisions of this Section of the Specifications apply to all Sections of Division 16000. B. This Section includes all labor, material, equipment and services necessary and incidental to complete all the demolition and removal of all electrical systems as noted on the Drawings. C. Coordinate demolition with the Owner's asbestos abatement contractor to ensure that all required demolition is included in the project. Any demolition work not included in the asbestos abatement contractor's work, but required for the project shall be included under this section by the Division 16 contractor. Coordinate work with the asbestos abatement contractor closely, especially where equipment or devices are noted on the plans to be reused or protected. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01120 - Special Project Procedures. B. Section 02072 -Minor Demolition for Remodeling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the building to determine actual conditions and extent of work prior to bidding the project. Refer any unclear details or conflicts to the Architect/Engineer for clarification prior to bidding the drawings. B. Verify that field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. C. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. D. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 154 16025 DEMOLITION 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate phasing of the demolition work with the construction sequence schedule. B. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. C. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company. D. Identify existing electrical equipment such as conduits, boxes, pullboxes, conduit bodies, and conduit racks that will need additional support due to the demolition of the existing supports. E. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems, including telephone and data systems, in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experience in such operations. F. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service throughout the entire construction period. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify and obtain permission from Owner, Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours before partially or disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. G. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service throughout the entire construction period. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify and obtain permission from Owner, Architect /Engineer and local fire service at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in area adjacent to work area. H. Existing Telephone /Data System: Maintain existing systems in service throughout the entire construction period. Disable systems only to make switchovers and connections. Notify and obtain permission from Owner, Architect /Engineer and Telephone Utility Company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. I. Existing Security System: Maintain existing system in service throughout the entire construction period. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify and obtain permission from Owner, Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under and this Section, and as indicated on the Drawings. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. 155 16025 DEMOLITION B. Provide supports for all existing electrical equipment that was supported previously by demolished walls, floors, ceiling or other structures. Provide new supports from structural members not slated for demolition, prior to any demolition. C. Owner reserves the right of first refusal to obtain material shown to be removed under this contract. Items not retained by the Owner become the property of the Contractor and must be removed from the premises. D. Demolish and remove all electrical systems indicated for demolition. No portion of these systems may be abandoned in place. E. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. F. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit in walls, floors, or columns back to a point where patching can be adequately performed and patch surfaces. G. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. H. Disconnect and remove abandoned panel boards and distribution equipment. I. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. J. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. K. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. L. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. M. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. Relocate and reroute conduit and wiring as required for conduit concealed in walls or structure being altered as part of the remodeling. Maintain continuity to all devices in and downstream of remodeled work. N. Reroute existing raceway and wiring which is exposed due to removal of existing construction. Conceal new raceway and wiring and maintain operation. O. If conductors are required to be removed from existing raceways, install with new conductors. P. Provide new coverplates throughout the remodeled areas. Q. Dispose of fluorescent lamps, ballasts, and other hazardous materials in accordance with State and Federal regulations. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR 156 16025 DEMOLITION A. Prior to reinstallation of used equipment, thoroughly inspect each item and report any defects to the Engineer /Architect in writing. Instructions for corrective measures will be given at the time and the Contract amount adjusted accordingly. If no defects are reported, the material will be included under the contractor's one year guarantee as outlined in Section 16010. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. C. Luminaries: Remove existing luminaries for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts, and broken electrical parts. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION 157 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. Sections 16010 and all references contained therein form a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 SCOPE A. The Provisions of this Section of the Specifications apply to all Sections of Division 16000. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material list in accordance with Section 16010, describing all material furnished under Part 2 of this Specification. B. Submit shop drawings for materials listed in Part 2 of this specification in accordance with the requirements of Section 16010. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide new, first quality material for all products specified. Do not reuse materials unless indicated or approved by the Engineer. B. Comply with the NEC as applicable to the construction and installation of equipment specified in this section. C. Provide equipment specified in this section that has been listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. D. Comply with ANSI as applicable to equipment specified in this section. E. Comply with NEMA as applicable to equipment specified in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Rigid steel conduit and fittings. 1. Provide hot -dip galvanized or electro- galvanized (inside and outside) conduit having a bichromate finish conforming to UL standard UL -6. 2. Provide zinc coated, threaded type fittings, couplings, and bushings. B. Rigid PVC coated steel conduit and fittings. 1. Provide hot dip galvanized or electro - galvanized rigid steel conduit with 40 mil. PVC coated outside. 2. Provide threaded type fittings, couplings and bushings with the same coating as the conduit. 3. Provide brush -on PVC touch -up compound. C. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) and fittings. 1. Provide hot -dip galvanized conduit conforming to UL Standard 1242 and Federal 158 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Specification WW- C -5SIE. 2. Provide zinc coated, threaded type fittings, couplings, and bushings. D. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and fittings. 1. Provide electro- galvanized tubing conforming to UL Standard UL797, with the interior having a smooth coating of aluminum lacquer or enamel. 2. Do not thread tubing. 3. Provide concrete -tight steel compression or set -screw type fittings, couplings and bushings. Cast or indentor type devices are not acceptable. E. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. 1. Provide Type U.A., hot -dip galvanized tubing conforming to U.L. Standard ULL 2. Provide steel or malleable iron type fittings, couplings and bushings. Cast type devices are not acceptable. F. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 1. Provide Type U.A. conduit covered with an extruded, polyvinyl chloride sheath. 2. Provide steel or malleable iron, water -tight type fittings, couplings, and bushings approved for use with liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. Cast type devices are not acceptable. G. Rigid non - metallic conduit and fittings. 1. Provide Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) rigid plastic conduit conforming to NEMA Specifications TC -2. 2. Provide plastic fittings, couplings, and bushings per manufacturer's recommendations for rigid non - metallic conduit, designed for use with solvent cement. H. Surface Metal Raceway and fittings. 1. Provide surface metal raceway conforming to NEC 352; Wiremold 500 or 700 or approved equal. 2. Provide fittings, connectors and accessories to provide a complete system. 2.2 OUTLET BOXES AND PULL /JUNCTION BOXES A. Provide galvanized code gauge steel junction and pull boxes with screw on covers of type, shape and size required to suit each installation.. Provide gasketing in damp and dusty locations. Provide cast boxes in weatherproof, vapor tight and explosion proof environments. B. Provide malleable cast iron or aluminum conduit bodies of type, shape and size required to suit each installation and conduit system. Do not use conduit bodies for conduits larger than I 112 ". C. Provide 3 1/2" deep boxes where installed in masonry, 2 1/2" minimum elsewhere. D. Provide a galvanized steel 4" square knockout type box as required. Acceptable 159 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS manufacturers: Race, Steel City or pre- approved equal. E. Provide a masonry type outlet box with knockouts, required. Acceptable manufacturers: Raco, Steel City or pre- approved equal. F. Provide FS and FD boxes as required. Acceptable manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse - Hinds, Killark or pre- approved equal. G. Provide a plastic 4" square box compatible with ENT conduit and fittings as required. Acceptable manufacturers: Carlon or pre- approved equal. H. Provide cast aluminum weather proof boxes with matching wall plates or special surface mounted covers, Slater B boxes, Bell 250 series or pre- approved equal. I. Refer to other sections for specific outlet box requirements. 2.3 WIREWAYS A. Provide "lay -in" type wireway with lengths and connectors hinged to provide unobstructed lay -in of conductors. All fittings must be so constructed to continue the "lay -in" feature through the entire installation. B. Provide all sheet metal parts with a rust- inhibiting phosphatizing coating and finished in baked enamel. Plate all hardware to prevent corrosion. Provide raintight construction with gasketed cover for all exterior wireway. C. Provide wireways without knockouts, except for exterior wireway. D. Provide U.L. label and listing for all lengths, connectors and fittings. Install in accordance with the National Electrical Code and the drawings. U.L. listing of lengths without listing connectors or fittings is not acceptable. E. Provide Square D "Square- Duct" wireway or pre- approved equal. 2.4 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE A. Provide copper conductors with 90 °C insulation system, 600 volt rating, U.L. approved and listed for specific application. B. Indoor, dry location, single conductor, insulated wire. 1. Provide THHN, THHW, THWN -2, XI -JHW, XHHW -2 insulation. 2. No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG: Provide solid or stranded conductors. 3. No.8 AWG and larger: Provide stranded conductors. C. Underground or wet location, single conductor, insulated wire. 1. Provide THHW, THWN -2, XHHW, XHHW -2 insulation 2. No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG: Provide solid or stranded conductors. 3. No.8 AWG and larger: Provide stranded conductors. D. Provide conductors for other systems as specified in the section in which they are described. E. Provide minimum No. 12 AWG conductor size, unless noted otherwise. Use the 160 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS minimum conductor size when no size is indicated. F. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Southwire 2. Essex 3. Pre - approved equal. 2.5 SPLICES, TAPS, AND TERMINATIONS A. Provide "crimp -on" or "wire -nut" self - insulating connectors for conductors No.8 AWG and smaller. Acceptable manufacturers: Ideal, 3M Scotchlok, Thomas & Betts B. Provide pressure or compression type connectors with snap -on insulating covers for copper conductors No.6 AWG and larger. Provide Burndy, OZ Gedney, 3M, Thomas & Betts or pre- approved equal connectors. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. Provide new wiring devices in each outlet indicated on the drawings. Provide all devices from one manufacturer. B. Provide gray wiring devices. C. Provide red devices for all receptacles connected to emergency circuits. D. Provide toggle switches that adhere to the following specifications: 1. Federal Specification WS896 -E. 2. Rated for 20 amperes, 120 -277 volts unless noted otherwise. 3. NEMA WDI standards. 4. UL listed. 5. Side and back wiring options. E. Approved toggle switch manufacturers /model numbers: 20/.120 -277V Wall Switches Mfr. 1 -pole 1 -pole 2 -pole 3 -way 4 -way Keyed Mom. w /Pilot 1 -pole Contact Cooper 2221 2221PL 2222 2223 2224 2221L 1995 Hubbel HBL122 HBL1221P HBL122 HBL122 HBL122 HBL1221 HBL155 1 L 2 3 4 L 7 P &S PS2OAC PS2OAC1- PS2OAC PS2OAC PS2OAC PS2OAC1- 1251 Leviton 1 RPL 2 2 4 L 1257 1221 -2 1221 -2PL 1222 -2 1223 -2 1224 -2 1221 -2L F. Provide receptacles that adhere to the following specifications: 1 Federal Specification WC596. 161 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 2 UL listed. 3 Side and back wiring options. 4 One piece solid brass ground strap with integral ground, except GFI receptacles. 5 NEMA 5 -20R configuration, rated for 20 amperes at 125 volts, unless noted otherwise. Provide special purpose receptacles rated for the equipment used. 6 Provide TVSS (transient voltage surge suppression) receptacles that adhere to UL 1449 (second edition), UL 498 and ANSI /IEEE 62.41 -1991. G. Approved standard receptacle manufacturers /model numbers: 20A/125V Standard Receptacles Mfg. Simplex Duplex GFI IG TVSS Tamper Resistant Cooper 5361 5362 XGF20 IG5362 5362S TR8300 Hubbell HBL5361 HBL5362 GFR5352A IG5362 HBL5360SA HBL8300SGA P &S 5361 5362A 2094 IG6300 8300SP TR63H Leviton 5361 5362 8899 5362 -IG 7380 8300 -SG H. Interior Coverplates: Provide new coverplates over all boxes with the following specifications: 1. All finished areas and unfinished areas with recessed boxes: Provide type 302 stainless steel with smooth satin finish. 2. Unfinished areas over surface mounted boxes: Provide raised metal cover to match the surface metal box. 3. Provide appropriate covers over special purpose receptacles" I. Exterior Coverplates: Provide new 2 -gang, "while in use ", weatherproof coverplates for outlets and switches as indicated on the Drawings. Provide weatherproof boots for all dropcords as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Weatherproof switch coverplates: Cast aluminum or Lexan with cover and vinyl gasket for weatherproofing switch; or cast aluminum with lever and weatherproof gasket. 2. Weatherproof receptacle coverplates: Cast aluminum or Lexan with cover and vinyl gasket for weatherproofing receptacle. 3. Approved manufacturers: a. Red Dot 2CKD Series b. or pre- approved equal 4. Weatherproof boots: Yellow rubber, with overlapping design to seal out water and dirt. Rubber boot shall keep weatherproof seal intact when plug is used with wall mounted receptacles. 162 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS J. Provide specification grade special purpose receptacles as indicated on the plans. 2.7 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide safety switches as disconnects for all utilization equipment as indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide surface mounted safety switches consisting of one of the following types: 1. A heavy duty switch with quick -make, quick -break mechanism with positive interlock. 2. A molded case switch. C Mount exterior located switches in a NEMA 3R enclosures. Mount interior located switches in a NEMA I enclosures, unless indicated otherwise. D. Provide a molded case switch in a NEMA I with flush mounting enclosure for flush mounted safety switches. E. Provide switch with switch mechanism suitable for Class R cartridge fuses, where "Fused" switch is indicated. F. Provide Cutler - Hammer, General Electric, ITE /Siemens, Square -D, or pre- approved equal. 2.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide mechanically fastened, black, laminated plastic, engraved plate with white melamine core and black melamine surface. Machine engrave characters with a minimum height of 1/4 ". Use when "Name Plates" or "Labeling" is referred to. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT/RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Encase all conductors in a continuous raceway system. Provide pull and junction boxes as required by the NEC. Size all raceway per the NEC with oversize conduits as indicated. Provide minimum 3/4" conduit for branch circuit homeruns, provide minimum 1/2" conduit, unless, noted otherwise. Provide EMT raceway with the following exceptions: 1. Provide rigid steel or IMC for the following: a. For all voltages over 600 volt b. For all conduit exposed below 4' 0" AFF c. Underground d. In or under concrete floor slabs on grade e. Exterior masonry wall s f. Wet locations g. Tunnels h. As required by the NEC 163 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. Provide flexible steel conduit for the following: a. Motor and transformer locations. b. Equipment connections. c. Lay -in light fixture connections, provide 1/2" unless local codes allow 3/8 ". d. Provide sufficient length of flexible conduit to assure flexibility of connections, minimum 18 ". e. Provide ground type fittings and grounding conductor inside all flexible conduit. Adjust conduit size if required. 3. Provide liquid -tight flexible steel conduit for the following: a. Motor connections in damp or wet locations. b. Equipment connections in damp or wet locations. c. Provide sufficient length of flexible conduit to assure flexibility of connections, minimum 18 ". d. Provide ground type fittings and grounding conductor inside all flexible conduit. Adjust conduit size if required. 4. Provide non - metallic conduit only where specifically noted on the drawings or specified within. Rigid non - metallic conduit may be used underground and below concrete floor slabs on grade. Provide insulated ground conductor for all wiring in non - metallic conduit. 5. Provide MC cable only where specifically noted. B. Provide buried rigid metallic conduit or concrete encased PVC conduit for all service entrance conductors. C. Where PVC is allowed to be installed underground or in concrete slabs, provide RMC or IMC elbows for all elbows. D. Do not route any conduits across rooftops, unless specifically allowed and noted on the plans to do so. If conduits are allowed to be routed across rooftops, install conductors in rigid steel conduit and provide proper derating of the conductor ampacities to account for the high ambient temperature as required in NEC Art. 310- 15. E. Provide two coats of bituminous paint (Koppers Bitumatic #50 or equal) or by vinyl tape (3M Scotchrap #43 or equal), or PVC coated for all metal conduits (including all elbows) installed underground or in concrete slabs. Slope all conduit penetrating building walls below grade away from the building. F. Terminate all conduits at cabinets and boxes with locknuts and bushings. Provide insulating bushings on all conduit 1" and larger. G. Support all trapezes and all above ground feeder conduits from the building structure. Provide conduit supports, not to exceed 7 0 ", for all conduit less than 1" in diameter. H. Route all horizontal raceway above water piping, where possible. 164 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I. Do not support conduit with wire, nylon ties, nor perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. J. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. K. Provide recessed outlet boxes and junction boxes in all new construction. Conceal all conduit work in new construction, except mechanical rooms. Conduit and boxes in mechanical spaces may be run exposed. L. Run all exposed conduit in a neat, workmanlike manner parallel to the building lines, tight to the wall and ceiling surfaces, and firmly support with conduit clamps or hangers. Provide two (2) hole mounting straps, minimum three (3) feet on center, for all surface conduit mounted on walls less than six (6) feet above finished floor. M. Do not run conduits in columns except to feed column mounted devices. Do not route conduit through structural slabs, beams, or columns, unless approved by the Structural Engineer. N. Place conduits at least 8" away from all hot piping and surfaces including domestic hot water lines. 0. Do not mount conduit on mechanical equipment except where necessary to connect electrical devices mounted on the equipment. Provide flexible conduit in all runs "bridging" vibration mountings. minimum of 12" and maximum of 24 ". P. Do not run conduit on or directly in front of access doors, removable panels, equipment removal spaces, control devices or other spaces necessary for normal maintenance and repair of the equipment. Q. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. R. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion, contraction and deflection where conduits cross seismic, control and expansion joints. Avoid crossing expansion joints where possible. S. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction. Cap or plug ends of conduit that are to remain empty and make watertight. Clean and swab conduits prior to pulling in conductors. T. Provide nylon pull string in all empty conduit with a stamped plastic label indicating future use. U. Provide watertight seal, approved by the Architect, for all roof penetrations. V. Provide air tight seals for all raceway penetrating air plenums. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. Seal vapor barriers tight to conduit penetrating vapor barriers. W. Seal all conduit penetrations of smoke or fire rated walls or floors with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal. X. Seal all conduits where they pass through exterior walls and where they enter exterior fixtures. 165 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Y. Seal all conduits where temperature differential between adjacent spaces is greater than 30 degrees Fahrenheit. 3.2 OUTLET BOXES AND PULL/JUNCTION BOXES A. Mount outlets boxes in exposed masonry walls with the bottom of the box on the top of the mortar joint and the vertical line of the box either on the mortar joint or on the center line of the masonry unit. Plumb and accurately align all wall outlets in rows. Mount ceiling boxes symmetrical with walls, beams and/or tiles. B. Coordinate the location of all outlets with architectural and mechanical drawings before installation. Coordinate all door swings in the field before locating switches. C. Mounting heights indicated on the drawings are from the center of the outlet box to the finished floor directly below the outlet. Exterior heights arc from inside adjacent door, or if no door, from the first floor above grade, unless noted otherwise. Verify heights of all outlets located above wall radiation to assure location of outlets to be above top of radiation covers. D. Provide center studs in boxes for direct fixture mounting. Provide special fixture hangers and/or auxiliary supports where the weight of the fixtures require more support than the fixture stud. E. Do not mount boxes back -to -back and nippled together. Do not install boxes in the same stud space in party walls. F. Do not use through -wall boxes unless specifically noted. G. Sectional boxes are not allowed. H. Where required, provide metal divider in multi gang boxes to separate low voltage cables from power wiring. I. Close openings in all outlet boxes during plaster and concrete work with plain paper or slip on plastic or metal plates. Do not use newspaper. J. Provide knockout closures to cap used knockout holes where blanks have been removed. K. Provide pull boxes located to be accessible when the building is finished. Coordinate location of pull /junction boxes with other divisions(trades) prior to installation. Do not locate pull boxes in finished spaces without the specific approval of the Engineer /Architect. Provide W' space behind boxes when mounting in wet or damp locations. Equip boxes requiring 4 -1/2" square or smaller covers with blank covers to match switch plates. Paint 5" square or larger steel pull box covers to match electrical panel fronts. L. Provide FS and FD boxes and required covers in wet or damp locations. Boxes to be surface mounted or as indicated on the drawings. M. Cast aluminum boxes shall be used for all surface mounted outlets in finished areas, or in interior damp or wet locations. N. Provide air tight seals for all boxes in air plenums that can allow air to pass through connecting conduit. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. 166 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.3 WIRING A. Refer to subsequent section (i.e. 16400, 16500, etc.) to determine where specified conductor and insulation types may be used. B. Examine all wire before installation. Do not use any wire with insulation that is damaged in any way. C. Do not pull wire into the conduit until the conduit system is complete. Pull all conductors into raceway at the same time. D. Route one A phase conductor and one B phase conductor and one C phase conductor (and neutral and grounding conductors if applicable) within the same raceway for each of the parallel raceways. Provide identical length conductors for all phases and neutrals for each parallel feeder. E. Test all cable and wire for continuity and for shorts prior to energizing any circuits. F. Where isolated ground receptacles are used, install separate hot, neutral and ground conductors for each circuit wired to the isolated ground receptacles. G. Provide conductors color coded as follows: 1. 2081120 Volt Systems a. Phase A - Black. b. Phase B -Red. c. Phase C -Blue. d. Neutral - White. e. Ground - Green. H. All Conductors are No. 12 AWG copper unless indicated or specified otherwise. I. All conductor sizes indicated on the drawings are based on copper conductors. Do not substitute smaller conductors with higher temperature rated insulation. J. Maximum number of conductors in raceways and boxes shall conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Neatly trim and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panels. K. Provide air tight seals for all wiring penetrating air plenums. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. Seal vapor barriers tight to wiring penetrating vapor barriers. Provide plenum rated cable, where indicated on the drawings or specified herein, for all cable routed in air plenums. 3.4 SPLICES, TAPS AND TERMINATIONS A. Provide "pigtail "type splices and taps in wire No.8 AWG and smaller. Use "wire -nut" self insulating connectors. B. Use pressure or compression type connectors for all splices or taps in copper conductors. C. Do not splice conductors of dissimilar metals together 167 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.5 WIRING DEVICES A. Provide new devices for all outlets indicated. Provide individual GFI, isolated ground and surge suppression device for each duplex receptacle in ganged outlets. • B. Wire each device by wrapping the conductors around the terminals and torquing the screw terminal tight. C. Mount all receptacles with the ground lug on the top. D. Replace all receptacles and plates that have been damaged, burned or discolored during construction, prior to Substantial Completion. E. Install wall plates after all painting has been completed. F. Mount wall mounted dimmers in separate boxes from switches. G. Test all wiring devices for continuity, proper polarity connections and grounding. 3.6 HAZARDOUS AREAS A. Install all wiring, devices, outlets, and lighting fixtures in hazardous areas in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements for that classification of hazardous locations. Provide all devices and equipment approved by the Underwriter's for this type of location. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide plastic laminated "NAME PLATES" as indicated or required in individual specification sections. Install name plates inside covers in finished areas using approved contact cement. Install name plates outside covers in unfinished areas using approved contact cement, self - tapping screws, or rivets. B. Stencil or paint both sides of covers to label all feeder junction and pull boxes; communications systems junction and pull boxes; all junction boxes, pull boxes, and raceway installed for future use. Provide color as directed by Owner. C. Provide engraved cover plates where indicated on the Drawings. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. Test all equipment and systems in accordance with Section16196. B. Adjust and leave in proper operating condition. C. Test all wiring and leave free of defective installation and unintentional grounds. D. Prior to turning the building over to the Owner turn on all equipment in the building including lighting and with a multi meter, read the current drawn on each hot leg of feeder supplying each distribution panel. If the current in anyone leg varies more than 5% (plus or minus) from the arithmetic average of the current in all the hot legs, reconnect the branch circuits to obtain a balanced loading. END OF SECTION 168 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a part of each Division -16 section making reference to supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Clevis hangers 2. Riser clamps 3. C- clamps 4. I -beam clamps 5. One -hole conduit straps 6. Two -hole conduit straps 7. Round steel rods 8. Expansion anchors 9. Toggle bolts 10. Wall and floor seals B. Supports, anchors and sleeves furnished as part of factory - fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division -16 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide supporting devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required that are manufactured by firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of such devices. B. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. C. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA std Pub No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies ". D. Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports and equipment mounting. E. Provide electrical components which are UL- listed and labeled. PART 2 PRODUCTS 169 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 2.1 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installers' option. B. Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated, and having the following construction features: 1 Provide clevis hangers for supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" dia. hole for round steel rod. 2 Provide riser clamps for supporting metal conduit; black steel; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4" ears. 3 Provide C- clamps of black malleable iron; 1/2" rod size. 4 Provide I -Beam clamps of galvanized steel, 1 -1/4" x 3/6" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2 ", 5 Provide one -hole conduit straps for supporting metal conduit; galvanized steel. 6 Provide two -hole conduit straps for supporting metal conduit; galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width. 7 Provide hexagon nuts for 1/2" rod size; galvanized steel. 8 Provide round steel rod of galvanized steel; 1/2" dia. D. Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 1. Expansion Anchors: 1/2 ". 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16" x 4 ". E. Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes, and material indicated; having the following construction features: 1. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves 1 -1/2" larger than O.D. of pipe. 2. Set all sleeves true to line, grade and position and plumb or level after concrete is poured. Correct any deviation from proper position. 3. Provide minimum of three (3) concrete anchors for Schedule 40 pipe sleeves. 4. Provide factory- assembled wall and floor seals. Provide watertight seals around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete below grad floors and wall. Construct with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. 170 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 5. Caulk spaces between pipe and floor sleeves inside the building with a waterproof caulking material. Caulk spaces between pipe and exterior partition sleeves with glass fiber insulation. 6. Furnish sealable penetration pockets compatible with the building roofing system where conduits pass through the roof Turn pockets over to the General Contractor. 7. Provide fire barriers around conduit, pipe, tubing, bus ducts and cables passing through smoke and fire rated floors and walls. Provide CP 25, 303 and PSS7904 Series by 3M, or "Flame- Safe" system by Thomas and Betts Corp for fire seals. 8. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water -tight seals by Thunderline or pre- approved equal. F. Provide U- channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16 -gage hot dip galvanized steel, or types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U- channel: 1. Fixture hangers 2. Channel hangers 3. End caps 4. Wiring stud 5. Thinwall conduit clamps 6. Rigid conduit clamps 7. Conduit hangers 8. U -bolts 2.2 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. Provide sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet -metal fabricated from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6 ", 16 gage; over 6 ", 14 gage. Sheet metal sleeves shall not be used for cable. 2. Steel -Pipe fabricated from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 3. Iron -Pipe fabricated from cast -iron or ductile -iron pipe; remove burrs. B. Provide fire barrier sleeve seals for sleeves located in floor and firewall. Provide fire barrier material as described above. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES 171 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install hanger, anchors and sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure supporting devices comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA. Extend sleeves 3/4" above floor surface. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Support suspended conduit runs threaded rod and galvanized conduit hangers. Attach the hanger rod to concrete structural members with malleable iron inserts, to existing or precast concrete structural members with self - drilling anchors, to structural steel with steel "c" clamps, and to wood with suitable sized lag screws and angles. Support multiple parallel conduit runs on trapeze hangers constructed of steel rod hangers and structural channel. Include three (3) nuts jam- locked, on all threaded rod hangers, to rigidly support the conduit. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. D. Support surface mounted conduit runs with galvanized pipe straps. Fasten pipe straps to masonry surfaces with self - drilling anchors or toggle bolts. Fasten pipe straps to wood or sheetmetal surfaces with pan head sheetmetal screws. E. Support all ceiling mounted receptacles with a listed tile bridge spanning the suspended ceiling grid, plus a 1/4" threaded rod anchored to a structurally sound member directly above the outlet box. END OF SECTION 172 16191 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EOUIPMENT SECTION 16191 ELECTRICAL, CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division -16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division -15 and -16 section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment. B. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following: 1. From electrical source to motor starters. 2. From motor starters to motors. 3. To switches and lighting fixtures. 4. To miscellaneous equipment forming part of other divisions. C. Make electrical connections to all motors, appliances and other equipment and the associated control devices in accordance with the schedules on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1. In each case verify connections and physical data from approved shop drawing, manufacturers' wiring diagrams and /or detail drawings provided by relevant trade subcontractor. 2. Make connections to all motors and equipment furnished and set in place by others. Provide starters, manual controls and auxiliary equipment where indicated in schedules and specified herein. Provide all disconnect switches as indicated in schedules, specified herein and required by code. D. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in Division -15 and other Division -16 sections, and are work of this section. E. Motor starters and controllers, not as integral part of equipment, are specified in applicable Division -16 sections. F. Refer to Division -16 sections. G. Refer to Division -15 sections for connection requirements for air handling and temperature control equipment. 173 16191 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EOUIPMENT H. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division -16 sections. I. Electrical identification for wire /cable conductors is specified in Division -16 section, "Electrical Identification ". J. Raceways and wires /cables required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division -16 sections. K. Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches. B. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA and ANSI/EIA standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical connections for equipment. C. Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide electrical connection products and materials which are listed and labeled by nationally recognized testing laboratories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Provide complete assembly of materials, including but not limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire -nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations for each electrical connection indicated. B. Wires, Cables and Connectors: 1. Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with Division -16 basic electrical materials and methods section "Wires and Cables ". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 174 16191 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EOUIPMENT A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with work, including wires /cables, raceway and equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work. C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. D. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire. F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam -type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A. H. Provide flexible conduit for connection of motors and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration. Refer to Section 16050. I. Fasten identification markers to each electrical power supply wire /cable conductor in accordance with Division -16 section "Electrical Identification ". Affix markers on each terminal conductor, as close as possible to the point of connection. 3.3 CONNECTIONS TO TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Make electrical connections as indicated in the plans and specifications to temperature control devices according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with Division 15. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate 175 16191 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EOUIPMENT capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 176 16500 LIGHTING SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE A. Sections 16010 and 16050 and all references contained therein form a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 16010 - "Submittals" describing all material furnished under Part 2 of this Section of the Specifications. B. Submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture assembled in alphabetical order by 'type'. Submit manufacturer's data including dimensioned drawings and photometric data prepared by an independent nationally recognized testing lab. C. Submit shop drawings for each ballast type as specified and/or indicated on the drawings. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Prior approval submittals for all lighting fixtures must contain a complete luminaire specification with photometric data. Submittals must be received in accordance with General Conditions and Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NEC as applicable to the installation and construction of light fixtures. B. Comply with UBC as applicable to the installation and construction of light fixtures. C. Provide light fixtures that are listed and labeled by U.L. or another nationally recognized testing laboratory for the application. D. Provide lamp ballasts that comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label. E. Comply with all local, state and federal energy codes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide fixtures with lamps for each outlet shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Deep cell parabolic to match existing relocated fixtures in office space. B. Provide U.L approved fixtures. C. The type fixtures required are as noted by a capital letter on the Drawings. Contractor is solely responsible for the exact quantities. It is the Contractors responsibility to provide the proper length and switching configuration in each room. 2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS -T8 AN COMPACT FLUORESCENT A. Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts with the following minimum specifications 177 16500 LIGHTING 1. Disconnecting means on the line side of the ballast to disconnect all hot and neutral conductors, as required after January 1, 2008 by the 2005 NEC article 41O.73G. Provide either factory- installed disconnecting means, or provide field - installed disconnect inside the ballast channel a. Approved field - installed disconnect 1) WAGO 873 2) 3M approved equal 2. Provide U.L listed and labeled, CB.M. approved ballasts. 3. Programmed Rapid Start technology to ensure longest lamp life. 4. Class "P" rated with thermally activated automatic resetting protective devices sealed in housing. 5. Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less on 60 Hz modulated current. 6. Comply with FCC Rules Part 18 requirements governing electromagnetic and radio frequency interference. 7. Complies with IEEE 587 for withstanding line transients, voltage regulation ± 10 percent, light regulation ± 10 percent. 8. Ballast Factor: 0.88 or higher. 9. Power Factor: greater than 95 percent. 10. Sound rating: "A" 11. Minimum 5 year warranty including $10/ballast labor. 12. Total Harmonic Distortion: <20 %, but greater than 10 %. 13. End -of -life lamp sensing for all Compact Fluorescent ballasts. B. Provide ballasts and lamps suitable for starting at a minimum starting temperature of - 20 degrees F. when "cold weather" fixtures are indicated on the light fixture schedule or any fixture mounted on the exterior of the building. C. Approved manufacturers -T8 electronic ballasts 1. Advance Centium Program Rapid Start series 2. Universal Lighting Technologies Triad AccuStart series 3. Osram Quicktronic ProStart series 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS -T8 A. Provide minimum 85 CRT for all fluorescent lamps. Provide 4100K color lamps for all fluorescent fixtures. B. Provide F032, F025 and F017 'IS lamps for all 4', 3' and 2' fixtures, respectively, unless noted otherwise. C. Approved manufacturers: 1. GE Starcoat SPX 2. Phillips TL80 178 16500 LIGHTING 3. Osram Sylvania Octron 800XP 2.4 EXIT LIGHTS A. Provide and install where directed Dual Lite LX Series LED Exit Signs.(Red AC Only Models. Wire to emergency power circuit. Locations will be indicated at walkthrough. PAFT 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES A. Provide all hangers, rods, mounting brackets, supports, frames, etc. for proper and safe fixture installation. Install all fixtures in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and instructions. B. Provide fixtures complete with all auxiliaries required for proper, safe and distortion free installation in the various ceiling constructions in which they appear. Coordinate ceiling types with the Architectural drawings and provide compatible fixtures. C. Securely support all light fixtures directly from building structural members or 1 -1/2" or larger steel ceiling framing channels. Use steel channel equivalent to Kindorf #6029 where it is necessary to span the building structural members for fixture support. Wood supporting members or wires will not be acceptable. Provide minimum 1/4" diameter lag screws when anchoring into wood structural members. Penetrate wood structural members a minimum of 2" with all screws. Provide steel or lead, expandable type, anchors with minimum penetration of 1 -1/2" when anchoring to concrete. D. DO NOT suspend any conduit, light fixtures, or ballasts from metal roof deck or from the ceiling suspension wires. Support all lay -in fixtures independent of the ceiling support system. Provide fastening clips on each comer of each fixture in accordance with the State Building codes. E. Support all surface mounted fluorescent fixtures with a minimum of one hanger per fixture plus one per row. Support individual fixtures with a minimum of two hangers. Attach fixture hangers to the ceiling grid per code. F. Support all suspended fluorescent fixtures with a minimum of two fixture hangers. Attach each hangar to a dedicated anchor. Locate hangars directly above the corners of the light fixtures. G. Where master /slave or inboard /outboard switching is indicated, provide tandem -wired ballasts between light fixtures as required by the Minnesota Energy Code. 3.2 WIRING A. Wire all recessed lay -in fixtures with 6 feet of flexible metal conduit with Type "THHN /THWN" wire to the outlet box. Provide grounding type connectors for all conduit and cable. B. Provide outlet boxes adjacent to each recessed fixture outlet in suspended ceilings to permit each fixture to be adjusted to fit ceiling pattern and to permit "Feed Through" wiring. 3.3 QUALITY CONTROL A. At the time of substantial completion, all fixtures must be installed and la.mped with 179 16500 LIGHTING new lamps. Install all fixtures complete with lenses, diffusers, reflectors, louvers and other required accessories. B. Replace any damaged reflectors, diffusers, louvers or other components at no expense to the Owner. C. Clean all fixtures free of dust, fmger prints, paint, etc. D. Replace all defective ballasts within the guarantee period at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 180 Office emodeling & S ,, . a .1 ° •a b�. o O 8 1 N O W V 0 f . . a d a y v y 4i U s w Columbia Heights City Hall .T^ 590 40th Avenue , TN m., • , ® l is He r. . z ,, SC E t " L E iitiF �I� WINS.. , S : Cover Sheet 1 4 O General Construct Notes 2 i, New Construction Notes 3 .. , First Floor Modifications 4 u Second Floor Modifications 5 Demolition Plan 6 D 14) .� Floor Framing Plan 7 E 2 5 Electr Plan 8 Security o. Window Sizes 9 u „0 , 1 . Details 1 1. 1 , r.-.1 , ,, Mechanical Plan 11 i, ( ,, ,! :, . GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: Provide security of the work, including tools and installed materials. Protect the work stored products, construction equipment and Contractor shall visit the site before bidding and shall familiarize themselves with existing conditions and the owner's property from theft and vandalism and protect the premises from entry by unauthorized personnel until final acceptance by requirements of the project prior to developing their bid. Material quantities shall be based upon actual field project manager. ' conditions and measurement. Do not rely on scaling plans for accurate dimensioning. All products and equipment shall be delivered in undamaged condition and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instruction to Contract shall include all construction as shown on drawings, details and specifications. avoid disruption of the work or damage to the items. Replace damaged or unfit materials, at no cost to the owners. I ' All drawings herein create an entire package. All trades shall be responsible for reviewing their respective Notify project manager when the work is substantially complete and ready for inspection. Provide written operation and requirements and coordinating their hidden or exposed work with other trades. maintenance instructions and guarantees for all equipment and materials installed. Provide written guarantees for a period of at least one year from the date of final acceptance of the work. Contractor shall provide supervision, labor, material and equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, dumpster, final cleanup, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of work. Allowable tolerances: Unless noted otherwise, the following tolerances shall apply to all work: Unless specifically noted otherwise, the city will issue a Building Permit to the contractor for no cost. -All vertical surfaces shall be plumb. - All horizontal surfaces shall be level. Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance coverage in accordance with the requirements of the applicable - Maximum deviation from the true plane for vertical and horizontal surfaces shall not be greater than 1/8" in 10' -0" as measured by governing bodies. Verify with owner and provide any additional owner requirements. a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface. - Wall and soffit intersections shall be 90 degrees or the exact angle indicated or intended. Temporary power, water and toilet facilities will be provided by the city. Housekeeping and cleanliness of the -All corners and edges shall be straight and true without dents, waves or bulges. toilet facilities is the responsibility of the contractor. -All joints shall be tight, straight, even and smooth. -All operable items shall operate smoothly without sticking or binding and without excessive "play" or looseness. b .s The contractor and their subcontractors and their respective work shall be performed by skilled mechanics and in Q accordance with acceptable trade practices and established standards of workmanship to ensure the highest quality Provide fmal cleanup and damage repair at the project conclusion. Leave the premises neat, clean and clear of tools, equipment fmished product. Express or implied. and surplus materials. Unless otherwise requested by the project manager, cleanup shall include, but not be limited to the following: I . The contractor and their subcontractors and their respective work shall be performed in compliance with the 2007 A. Power vacuum the space W ' Minnesota Building Code, laws, and ordinances, regulations and insurance requirements. B. Hand dusting and cleaning of all shelving, cabinetry, casework and glass. Z C. Repair or replacement of property damaged during construction or final completion of the project. j All dimensions are to finish surfaces, typical, unless indicated otherwise. DEMOLITION NOTES; Drawing dimensions shall take precedence over scaled drawings. Remove and store existing 2'X4' deep cell parabolic florescent and surface mounted light fixtures. 4 Contractor shall take care to protect adjacent areas from dust and damage during the construction process. Contractor shall clean up after themselves at the end of each workday. Provide temporary barriers to contain and Remove and store existing 2'X4' lay -in ceiling panels. c> separate work from public as required. Remove and dispose of existing suspended ceiling grid throughout All contractors shall stay behind the barriers and maintain access to public areas, clean and free of construction • 8 material and debris. Remove and dispose of ceiling and storage platform and framing above north office. >, A roll off dumpster will be allowed in the previous fire truck bay for security purposes. Only construction debris Remove and dispose of existing wood framing above lay -in ceiling throughout. U will be allowed in the dumpster. Remove and dispose of existing ductwork above lay -in ceiling. All unused equipment, materials and fixtures, etc required to be removed from the site shall be the responsibility •. t>0 c, of the contractor. All equipment, materials, fixtures, etc. noted to be reused shall be stored on site as directed by Remove and dispose of unit heaters above ceilings in office area. 0 iv project manager. ct p Remove piping of deadhead branches and cap at active piping. ,.fl Coordinate all work of the various trades and subcontractors to assure efficient and orderly installation. Provide - 20 accommodation for items installed at a later date. Verify that characteristics of the elements of interrelated Remove all existing line voltage wiring, conduits and devices to bare concrete walls. o , ° operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work of various sections which have interdependent U responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. Remove existing carpeting in previous fire department offices. c� • ° _� Maintain an active fire extinguisher at the project. Remove sliding glass borrow light and frame from wall between office and truck bay. 0 U vD In case of conflict between the project requirements and /or existing conditions, the one having the most stringent Remove sliding glass window, frame and sheves from Finance Department and patch wall to match existing. 1 requirements shall govern, as approved by the project manager. 1 i All work requiring the assistance of manufacturer's instructions, shall be performed in strict accordance with the ; i most current, written manufacturer's instructions. 1, — NEW CONS"1'RUCTION NOTES: Relocate thermostat to new wall on second floor. li Install new raised floor in former Assistant Fire Chiefs office to match former Fire Chiefs office. Install key card access to Council Chamber main entrance door. Also install a key -card access to the door leading from the Council Chambers to the employee area. Replace latch set with electrified hardware with storeroom function. Install new 2 -1/2 "steel stud framing and 1/2" gypsum board wall on office space side of concrete block walls. Coordinate with security contractor. Provide in -wall supports for partial height walls next to ramp in remodeled office as required. Cap walls with 3/4" Oak Modify and remount removed shelf from Finance Department window into lobby as directed by project manager. board and trim. Stain and finish with 3 coats of polyurethane finish. Mount at 34" AFF. Provide bracing as necessary. Install new lay -in ceiling at 9'0" AFF. Install (2) 4" EMT Empty Conduit raceways from above ceiling in new office to ceiling above Community Development. Install (1) 2" EMT Empty Conduit raceway from above ceiling in new office to server room on second Install existing 2X4 florescent lighting in office area. Add new fixtures to match existing to provide 100 fc of lighting floor for future Security CCTV. at the desktop. Relocate Fire Alain' Annunciator Panel from old watch office to new office. Install new carpet throughout new office including vinyl baseboard. Install new convenience outlets as shown on plan for equipment. MECHANICAL NOTES: Install new power circuits for office partitions in new walls as shown on plan. Office partitions by separate contractor. Disconnect and cap the HVAC duct system from Community Development. Install light switches as indicated. Demolition of existing ductwork, removal and capping of radiant heating units and controls are part of the general A a Install 2 new level 3 bullet resistant fixed windows with pass through from lobby area for new office. Sizes indicated demolition work of this contract. on drawing 9. Coordinate with mechanical contractor the installation of the HVAC system. New Air Handeling Unit (AHU) heating Install 1 new level 3 bullet resistant fixed window in wall between office and truck bay. Size indicated on drawing 9. and cooling, curb, economizer, controls, and air distribution system shall be by separate contractor. I Z Install (2) new Bullet Resistant Wood doors in existing frames at new office space. Doors to have storeroom latch set. Latch guard required on new office doors to allow reuse of existing frames. f � Install new 3 -5/8" steel stud security wall with %" Gypsum board and double door in main lower level hallway as shown on plan. I � 71- Coordinate the installation of a card reader and latching device on lobby door to main corridor with the security contractor. Install bypass button for card reader at main water billing counter for granting access through the lobby door. Install new wall, double door and frame in main upper level hallway as shown on plan. Coordinate the installation of a card reader and latching device on lobby door to main corridor with the security contractor. Paint interior of new office with one coat of primer and 2 coats of final color. to Paint walls with 1 primer coat and 2 finish coats of latex wall paint. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard color pallet by Finance Department Director. Paint door frames with 2 coats of oil based enamel. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard color pallet by Finance Department Director. o Install steel stud partition wall with 5/8" gypsum board each side to segregate the public area from the employee areas on the second floor as shown on drawing 5 Area B. Install new door and frame electrified hardware and storeroom o function latch set as shown. Relocate (2) surface mounted light fixtures removed from former Assistant Fire Chiefs office to area behind new partition wall on second floor. Install new switch inside employee area. Relocate existing women's toilet room door as indicated. Patch wall to match and repaint to match. FIRST FLOOR MODIFICATIONS ,. - ,: , _ . _ = I . I .. Area 3 ' II AREA 1: 1 1 i I I II Demolition of old fire department offices and remodeling of old fire department offices and adjacent hallway in ` accordance with Demolition Plan 6, New Floor Joists Plan 7, Electrical Plan 8 and New Security Windows Details 9 and doors. Install latch guard on office doors. Electrified hardware with storeroom function for latch sets. Install new wall with double door across hallway. Only one leaf active. Read in only. AREA 2: = Installation of door release hardware and key -card reader access from rear hallway door at Fire House Golden Firehouse Gym I-E Gloves area to egress hallway. Change latch set to storeroom function. Area 2 1 AREA 3: ,?, . an p I Reverse frame and door swing on door leading from the old training room hallway to old police department lobby. Q I' z i ! d- 0 c, Area 1 r Elevator to 4 j .-- L Finance Departrne 'F.5 1 Utilit Billin ment a) Elevator ■� I E Lobby 0 : r� �a' I Community 0 • Development it U II ,F ----- 1 V ,, , i .' SECOND FLOOR MODIFICATIONS II ! AREA A: Council Chambers Area D Remove passage windows and counters from hallway into Finance Department. Infill block wall with stacked bond masonry to match adjacent existing wall. 1 Jens I Add new double door (one side active) and key -card access (read -in read -out) in main 2nd floor hallway. 1 L- J • Coordinate with security company. Install panic hardware on non - secure side of doors to allow exit with local — Womens , 1 alarm. Securing hardware to fail open upon loss of building power or activation of alarm system. / AREA B: ' Employee Area a Relocate existing door and frame for women's restroom as shown. Infill opening left from relocation of existing door with construction to match existing and finish to match adjacent ar , --7 Area B Q� Construct new partition wall to isolate public areas from employee areas. Construction shall be 3 -5/8 "steel ' C studs 16" on center with 2" gypsum board applied each side. Install relocated 3'X6'8" solid wood door with L ! I rw light (from assistant Fire Chiefs office), new hollow metal door frame, key -card access and storeroom function electrified latch set. Coordinate with security company. r - - -- Conference I I t AREA C &D: I I Rooml ' L— -- Area C I ! Add key -card access, electrified hardware and self closer to existing doors and frames. Coordinate with ' " o security company. `r' Administration Department U vi Elevator +-■ Area A � � 4 t IC_ I 1 M i L I W 2nd Floor C1 CD E levator - Lobby Stairs O e--1 . I I c.a .� 0 o .,-, • i Wipmens U C) V) , 3 j Mer M I— i 1 li i , L J �.. Finance Department k DEMOLITION NOTES: bay, ductwork, all electrical wiring devices and conduits ________ , Remove interior room finishes down to concrete block wall (unless deemed necessary in new layout), two truck bay in former Fire Chief and Assistant Fire Chief's Office. door closer controls, carpet, and storage platform /ceiling in l Remove chiefs door and hallway walls. Ramp and raised Asst. Fire Chiefs office. Remove existing door and frame floor in Chiefs office is to remain. The removal includes from former assistant chief's office. Remove 2 unit heaters (but is not limited to) lay -in ceiling tiles, ceiling grid, light and cap pipes. fixtures, wall board, paneling, passage window to truck T v . ; L p i / I 7 • 7 W 1 p � F N 1 I 1- Lr -I r — L_ °� r i — r O // . \ / i \\ 1 1 1 1 \ I \ U / x a / c ,E L , W • O _ l U Demolition Plan V , _ __. c p__, _, e, - • v-4 (1.) . Not to Scale I i l i New Floor Notes: Install new 2X floor joists to match existing floor elevation on south end of office. Floor sheathing to be 3/4" Tongue and Groove plywood. Floor sheathing to be glued and screwed to joist to prevent squeaks Floor shall be installed to withstand a 100 pound per square foot load. T vi O A > ax ' W z 0 c czt E 11 I I I I 1 I 1 r I r O O .� � U v) I i I ,II ELECTRICAL NOTES: ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS: r 1 All electrical work shall be performed by electricians licensed by the State of Minnesota All line - current carrying conductors shall be installed in conduits. M Data/Telephone connection point. Installation shall comply with the 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC). ,' Minimum wire sizes shall be in accordance with the NEC. cn, Receptacle 4 -Plex Maximum conduit fill shall be in accordance with the NEC. ' Rece Receptacle Duplex Minimum outlet amperage shall be 20 amps. `;; p p Provide Data outlet box with % Data Conduit stubbed to above lay -in ceiling. Reuse existing deep cell fluorescent light fixtures in location denoted with E. (I) Partition feeder Box New deep cell fluorescent light fixtures to match existing. Each office partition electrical connection shall home run to panel board. +.3 -. Light Switch- 3 Way Each lighting circuit shall home run to panel board. Install a new Junction Box cover on large J -Box behind electrical panel board. Install low voltage cables from key card /electrified lock locations to existing control >< 2X4 Deep Cell Parabolic fluorescent light fixture module. One 22/8 Shielded for readers and one 18/2 power for locks. (each location) Install (2) empty 4" EMT conduits from above ceiling in remodeled office to ceiling E 2" Deep Cell Parabolic fluorescent light fixture existing re -used. ' above Community Development and (1) empty 2 EMT from above ceiling in remodele � 2X4 D C t '� ' a office to server room on 2nd floor for video cables. Provide bushings at each end. Relocate Fire Alarm Annunciation Panel from old watch room to new office. da ` A • 7 \11l 0 al: ``: rim. ` \ =1, - ' p �� cu 1 if'■� � i ii' ,. rl-4. —\ .� �.' i . �i�«E I \ i `` -- — - -_— — _ \\ `..\ �.�.� ___ - -- -- >< . N • \ / / E E \ E t/7 v� 1 - -- �!- / - - - - ----- I - .1`6 1-4 / i' - ' E E Pr ,,,i _ \ / 1 t g . \ ,� j .. ♦ I / '. i' -- �� h Al i � :, � uf,a 4 4.3 I 1 I� ��,q '� Tfn �� �- y 1 o 5 I v ' U v) l ( , - , , , _ ' i 00 i I � - -- _ srl I 1 l', 2' -8" 4' -8" 2 n J ■ I // 2" // [- N ii P -p q • C° I r C �- �, o co _ = I O I I Cif) CD i. is, \ \ 1 2" 0 t."< // ' r7 3' -10" ., r. / —/ 9 f P...i N ' ® \ I. - • 4 I 5 i A i1 a 1 4 vi T \ ' 2" 2" // // r 3.4 11 3 ,_ 4 „ r h ; "' F O ;, r .; ..... r'� Fl i L 1 Drawn By LRP City of Columbia Heights, City Hall, 590 40th Avenue NE. Revisions � , i�' y g y ' ''- Security Improvements 1. f / i ; a i l it I ' I Lay -in ceiling the and grid Ceiling , mounted 9' -0" AFF Ceiling 3 -5/8" steel stud 16 On Center 8 concrete block wall ,Ar" r � /z Gypsum board / % yp " Gypsum Board 3 X3 X/4 steel lintel / e / 2 -1/2 steel studs 16 O.C. Both sides z 3-5/8" 20 Gauge / e steel 9 \ stud spaced 16" O.C. • - ....*----- Hollow Metal -, \ Door Frame _0 rip Level 3 Bullet resistant / Y2 Gypsumboard both sides :- t ransaction window - f a bo and frame 7 i 1- i a N 1 o Z I� o Key Card Access strike plate � 00 \ 1 with electric latch. 1 (V / O O s " wood subfl r cv /4 Ply oo "-c - d floor channel both Wood floor framing 2 20 Gauge steel anchorin g Finished , i - I top and bottom Floorline U c e, o \ e \ \ \—Floor line ,b 4 iSI • 1 Ct N SDl Cross Section @ Accessible Window SD1 Cross Section @ Gypsumboard wall SDl Cross Section @ Access Control Door o o� U vp 1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT. (Drawing for reference only) > Provide (1) properly sized ground mounted Commercial RTU, McQuay, Carrier, York, Lennox, Trane or Equal. Temperature control for the unit > Gas piping as needed from existing gas supply • Economizer and 5 year manufacturer's warranty on compressor > Saw cut and patch wall for duct entry into building sidewall > Duct distribution and return system to accommodate the proposed plan > Lay -in ceiling diffusers and return grilles > Provide check, test, start and one year warranty on all installed equipment 3 > Provide all permits and inspections for legal installation > Coordinate equipment slab size with General Contractor. > Equipment slab and electrical by General and Electrical Contractors r v 2 p Ca w� W i I I I I _; a) �� cD I 1 I H I ,4 j, o I d . 0 a, 1 t r-. I bn c4 P t O '1 O 4 r., O . er, › U ..,, L._______E______J_ I, U Mechanical lan \i--mi 1.-- . ___ _ - _ 1 ! FIRST FLOOR MODIFICATIONS l; III i Area 3 I 1 AREA 1: Demolition of old fire department offices and remodeling of old fire department offices and adjacent hallway in accordance with Demolition Plan 6, New Floor Joists Plan 7, Electrical Plan 8 and New Security Windows Details 9 and doors. Install latch guard on office doors. Electrified hardware with storeroom function for latch sets. Install ' new wall with single wood door with half laminated tempered glass and hollow metal frame across hallway. Add Card Key Read in only. AREA 2: _ Firehouse Gym ' = Installation of door release hardware and key -card reader access from rear hallway door at Fire House Golden Area 2 1 Gloves area to egress hallway. Change latch set to storeroom function. )6 a - AREA 3 : c i > o Reverse frame and door swing on door leading from the old training room hallway to old police department lobby. H _ I� w z , I! h • _ d I a, Area 1 IDi U r Elevator r .3 _ Finance Department cu 7 Utility Bi Iing/Paymeat tv Elevator Lobby V _ O I, . U I Community ` Q ' ""' Development !� I I 0 I; U li I i III e, ti t--t --t — , SECOND FLOOR MODIFICATIONS AREA A: Area D '., Remove passage windows and counters from hallway into Finance Department. Infill block wall with stacked bond masonry to match adjacent existing wall. • Add new 3' -4 "single hollow metal door frame and wood door with full laminated glass window and key -card access (read -in read -out) in main 2nd floor hallway. Coordinate with security company. Install panic hardware on non- secure side of doors to allow exit with local alarm. Securing hardware to fail open upon loss of building power or activation of fire alarm system. i Council Chambers ao9 i 2b,5 AREA B: ' ' ., = Mens I I I I PQ ^� f Relocate existing door and frame for women's restroom as shown. Infill opening left from relocation of r Womens Area B a N existing door with construction to match existing and finish to match adjacent areas. 2403 Area r Construct new partition wall to isolate public areas from employee areas. Construction shall be 3 -5/8 "steel Z OZ (Employee Area W ' studs 16 on center with / "" gypsum applied light, 17 6u sum board a lied each side. Install new X6 8 solid wood door with li ht n new hollow metal door frame, key -card access and storeroom function electrified latch set. Coordinate with L - security company. H L J AREA C &D: r _ -, Area C d I I 0 I Li R00mt Conference s Add key -card access, electrified hardware and self closer to existing doors and frames. Coordinate with in • security company. COUNCIL CHAMBERS MAIN DOOR: Add key card access coordinate with security company Adm;nis a on Department U z Elevator I r r (I I I Area A rn Floor _ Ct g Elevator Lobby 1L- Z. 00 Stairs O _ in _ ti U ■ Wpmens (4—I s O 'S~— �.. ' U Me�s I�I L • '; Finance Department .I %i CO ebe ® Document G7OITM - 2001 WIN ix° Change Order PROJECT (Name and address): CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: 001 OWNER: ❑ Columbia Heights Office Remodeling & DATE: May 12, 2011 ARCHITECT: ❑ Security Improvements City of Columbia Heights CONTRACTOR: ❑ 590 40th Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 FIELD: ❑ TO CONTRACTOR (Name and address): ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: OTHER ❑ EDS Builders, Inc. CONTRACT DATE: 404A Saint Croix Trail North CONTRACT FOR: General Construction Lakeland, MN 55043 THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (Include, where applicable, any undisputed amount attributable to previously executed Construction Change Directives) Area A on Plan - continue sheetrock around corner to terminate at post and paint in lieu of infill block. Deduct - ($1,000.00) Supply new 3' x 6' -8" solid core oak door with 20" x 30" tempered and laminate lite in Area B. Add $ 580.00 Door 100, Area 1, supply 3'-4" x 6' -8" single solid core oak door with 20" x 30" tempered and laminate lite in lieu of double door. Deduct - ($1,065.00) Door 200, Area A, supply 3' -4" x 6' -8" single solid core oak door with 28" x 60" lite, tempered and laminate in lieu of double door. Deduct - ($1,165.00) Remove asbestos containing floor tile and adhesive plus disposal in south end of new finance dept. Add $ 977.00 Supply and install 12 sheets of 1/2" plywood Add $ 920.00 Total Change Order Deduct -($ 753.00) The original Contract Sum was $ 77,980.00 The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ 0.00 The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was $ 77,980.00 The Contract Sum will be decreased by this Change Order in the amount of $ 753.00 The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be $ 77,227.00 The Contract Time will be unchanged by Zero (0) days. The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is NOTE: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive. ( NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER. �� �W brA \ TA EDS Builders, Inc. City of Columbia Heights R l , (Fi�) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name) 404A Saint Croix Trail North 590 40th Avenue NE 71 I) r Lakeland, MN 55043 Columbia Heights, ►� 5421 1 ADDRES ADDRESS gnatur•e) BY (Sagnat re) BY (Signature) NGt _ Pi A-! Earl Doc Smith 0.1(/), . (Typed name) (Typed name) (Typed na ' e) 51/8 /zc /1 i7 '2/ Y ' df' DATE DATE DAT AIA Document G701 T" — 2001. Copyright © 1979, 1987, 2000 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects. AU rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any 1 portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 14:28:49 on 05/12/2011 under Order No.5846604474_1 which expires on 01/06/2012, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1733982763) AllPhase Companies, Inc. 404 -A St. Croix Trail North, Lakeland, MN 55043 Ph# 651- 436 -2930 Fax #651- 436 -3918 May 12, 2011 Mr. Earl (Doc) Smith EDS Consultants and Construction Managers 404 -A St. Croix Trail North Lakeland, MN 55043 Re: Removal of Asbestos floor tile adhesive and tile. Columbia Heights City Hall — 590 40 Avenue N.E., Columbia Heights, MN Project Number 1337 -11 E -A Dear Mr. Smith; AllPhase Company removed Category I asbestos containing floor tile and adhesive at the Columbia Heights City Hall at 590 40 Avenue NE, Columbia Heights The scope of our services was to remove the floor tile and adhesive located at the Columbia Heights City Hall. Our scope of services were limited to: A. Remove the asbestos containing building material in the room adjacent to the garage. The Minnesota Department of Health Certified Asbestos removal supervisor on -site was Rennie Smith of AIlPhase Certification MDH# AS3119. Asbestos removal was initiated on May 11 and completed by May 11, 2011. The asbestos containing material was removed in accordance to regulatory guidelines. 6 mil plastic was installed on all openings during removal process and a HEPA vacuum was used to perform final cleaning on the subject site. The asbestos containing material was disposed of at the SKB Rosemount Industrial Waste Facility as asbestos containing waste. SKB Rosemount is an approved asbestos disposal site that designates and manages asbestos in accordance to re ilatory guideli s. An Asbestos shipping manifest was promulgated at the time of removal , Manifest #187207. Rennie Smith, P.G. Environmental Consultant -- • , 4 171 SKB la:osemour I Industrial! Waste Facility Manifest # ENVIRONMENTAL 1. Generator's US EPA ID No. (if any) 2. Page 1 of page(s) ASBESTOS Shipping Manifest , 1 3. Generator's Name and Facility Address ‘. A Mailing Aildr,ess . A • ' 4. Generator% Phone § Fax _ 5. Transporter 1 Company Name _ Phone: 6. Transporter 2 Company Name Phone: 7. Designated Facility Name and Site Address SKB Rosemount Industrial Waste Facility 13425 Courthouse Blvd. Rosemount, MN 55068 651-438-1500 8A. Abatement/Generator Contractor • 8B. Responsible Agency MPCA Address Address 520 LAFAYETTE ROAD NORTH G City, State, Zip City, State, Zip ST. PAUL, MN 55155 E N Operators Phone No. 763-566-6900 651-296-7997 R • 8C. U.S. DOT Description (including Proper Shipping Name) 9 Containers 10. 11. 12. A Total Unit Waste Profile T No. Type Quantity WtNol Sheet # 0 R a. ASBESTOS,9,NA 2212,111 • • • . • b. • • 13. Additional Descriptions for Materials Listed Above (indicate waste stream Approval # below) 14. Special Handling Procedures for Wastes Listed Above a. MI b. MI 15. Special Handling Instructions and Additional Information SKB Use Only EMERGENCY CONTACT: Load # 1 ' t • ) Scale Wt. TonsNds. 16. GENERATOR/ABATEMENT CONTRACTORS CERTIFICATION: I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described above by proper shipping name and are classified, packed, marked, and labeled, and are in all respects in proper condition fortransport Ly highway according to applicable international and national government regulations. • s E Printed/Ty* Name Signature .' . Month. Day Year I ••••:r T 17. Transporter 1 Acknowledged of Receipt of Materials A Printed/Typed Name Signature Month Day Year S 1 1 1 1 1 1 o 18. Transported 2 Acknowledgement of Receipt of Materials T Printed/Typed Name Signature Month Day Year R 1 1 1111 19. Discrepancy Indication Space F A c L • 20. Facility Owner or Operator: Certification of receipt of non-hazardous materials covered by this Manifest except as noted in Item 19. Printed/Typed Name Signature Month Day Year 1 1 1 1 1 1 White - Return to Generator Green - Facility Copy Canary - Transporter #2 Pink Transporter #1 Goldenrod - Generator Copy 2 .vs i pil p ,,, NsT 141 . 1 1 t JT:\,1 MEr:i IA MEAL ith: dilt Miviitleitin ihVKI:11?, Mi:',91-:ffip:,Ii!;. MN tilliclintiiiitiiiti Attention: Lismetico Pepin j1:mereitcr P;11. Install COM 14)0 !' leighis (at' li idli 0>i' Med 08 add alb. silarirefebt riiiii.lbearatoo the otimatuniry in pronnse 'or services rm the above project, Mittileed below is. our resirionsu N yoa: request for rim quotation Mr rhis orojent #"* or Work: • Furnish and install a new 2 ton Rill with gas heat. # Furnish and install the supply and return duct necessary for proper on flow. . Furnish and install the gas piping for the new RTN L • Nine thousand nine hundred seventy seven dollars 00110 $9.977,00 — Alternate:01 # Furnish and install a new heat primp with two ducted head: a d controls # Install the condensing unit in the rage \ # .'in fre,:i air from 0 .side # R n o Ida sate to lor est drar a ) Ins all wo si ply tiffus, s a . I one re rt ,trill per as Twelve thousand six hundred e ,11te011 dollars 90M00 $12,618.00 Inclusions: SP All balancing ✓ controls . CririCr Ole CUtfing tOF ;he fiew dud Exclusions: • Overtime Oft hour work • Electrical • Demo of the old sparit6 • Any now concrete slabs Should You 1000 Wry qUe!3'60 00a5e , :;oninc1 nua at 612 328-8026 Sine et 01. BP p-JW'xl iNi ',- k.lz i kiboty t.in I Projecr Mantmer . .....„--- 16 brit Arillicrbacsi Sigilidli ire__ _ //- Iiiinio / 7 /.. • 6 / 1 . i ..J.„; ..4, _.=.-..r.-... - a.. , ,, , :::.-, , .,111- ___ - _, .- _________ ZVZ vd4v5 . `�' = t � S Fr ?� sr tg4�4rrrA►�'.- r 14tAt(igk.lh4 44:4 , Installed Cost Warranty Equipment Totel $ 2,966.64 One year Labor Total $ 3,288.00 One year Total Equipment investment $ 6,254.64 Pricing does not include applicable sales lax Lead Thne: Approximately 30 Days Wnrrantyi All items of equipment include 100% warranty on mechanical and electrical components to include parts and labor against defective workmanship and materials for 1 year fratn data of installation unless otherwise noted Installation: Installation is by reentry-trained technicians, All masonry, cement work, access tights, millwork, etectrient conduit and junction boxes and electrical power supply to he supplied by the general contractor at customer's expense. All wiring, cable, lock hardware, electric strikes, etc, by others as voted in RIP. Terms; 50M due with order, Balance this upon delivery of equipment. Agreed to and accepted by: Agreed to utid accepted by: r City of otumble I l,t re si ue ' Da le co a rep (signed) i771e Print Name &'Title Title 2... 0 i - .;,.. 312— 7 .,,,, :ak,„ c , N .til' , i ,,c, Document G7O1TM — 2001 Change Order PROJECT (Name and address): CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: 003 OWNER: 1,1 Columbia Heights Office Remodeling & DATE: July 29, 2011 Security Improvements ARCHITECT: 0 ., City of Columbia Heights CONTRACTOR: E 590 40th Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 FIELD: 0 TO CONTRACTOR (Name and address): ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: OTHER: 0 EDS Builders, Inc, CONTRACT DATE: 404A Saint Croix Trail North CONTRACT FOR: General Construction Lakeland, MN 55043 THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (Include, where applicable, any undisputed amount attributable to previously executed Construction Change Directives) Remove asbestos in lower level. Add $1,725.00 i Remove existing carpet in lower level, supply and install Blueridge carpet, floor prep, 6" Johnsonite base, reducer.Add $1,483.50 Remove and dispose of existing carpet from the top of the stairs continuing to the Council Chambers, supply and install new carpet with 4"carpet base. Work to be completed at night. Add $5,754.60 Replace carpet and base at corridor leading to Conference Room 2.t/Work to be completed at night. Add $2,612.80 Total change order 8i iailch ve,40 4/17,..--lf Add $11,575.90 The original Contract Sum was $ 77,980.00 The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ 2,208.00 The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was $ 80,188.00 The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of $ 11,575.90 The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be $ 91,763.90 The Contract Time will be increased by Zero (0) days. The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is NOTE: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive. NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER. City of Columbia Heights EDS Builders, Inc. City of Columbia Heights ARCHITECT (Firm name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name) Building Official 404A Saint Croix Trail North, 590 40th Avenue NE, Columbia 590 40th Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, Lakeland, MN 55043 Heights, MN 55421 MN 55421 ADDRESS ADDRESS 10 I N '''■ ADDRESS / 9 BY (Signature) BY (Signature) BY (Signature) Larry Pepin Earl Doc Smith Walter Fehst (Typed name) (Typed na e) I (Typed na e) DATE DATE DATE / AIA Document G701 TM - 2001. Copyright © 1979, 1987, 2000 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNIMI This All:' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthori7ed oproduction or distribution of this Ale Dc,cumtmt, or nny 1 portion oi it may result in severe civil aod criminal penalties, and will be prosccuted to the maximum extent nossitne wider the low This document was produced by AIA software at 11:00:38 on 07/29/2011 under Order No 5846604474_1 which expires on 01/06/2012, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1450854729) 111 Phase C'olizpistriec p tut 6 t-40 Fax_ 0651 Alf-391F Mr Earl (1300 SVt*th ETY5 Cm5,tallants and (amt. ilatoutflanagery Eet CIN5Ix Emil North Lakeland,. MN 5,51I43, D o 1 alt 1r g; ewe anti slab preparaficiu INVOICE: 1,33'77-1 :4 Flom r ttt R =.jai xrld adNyek .N'r art�C: Astietelm Please im -3 Al i wi: Courant e‘e, ItNotpototted 40.5A Stu tutx 7" 1t1 Neyrt,b talazialki, MN .55043 'RES t 'RE PLR NRAVIII AFTER ' AY 111. "ICI` P(114. UM,Ki AL COMPAMIC, 1 XI tAJ PROPOSAL Page BICKERS CITY HAL 64 34 7011 Project name COLLitellA Ff its CrY cit413 LCAvilt.! LEtAFtt COLUMBIA I CI tolt.Ell ''Att affiaatilt 217 Ezturnitar JO INS:7,Xv Ski 12:131 Pi (AWN ref.'61,„:1, Ali 7 ilaf' DEREN JOH DJOHNSONFLOORSBYBECKERS.COM 651-636-1100 ifeKERs PROPOSAL ctiLumem HEIGH TS C, iLIAt Page Z 1131111 Overt Description Taketiri City OH "4 FLOORING FLOOR PREP 141 L M 41 :.* 'Sy 4 L'ANzirifi LJ J Y.# 096500 RFSft (ENT fl. DORiNG 0911513 FIDDILICUT bAtt ANO M:Cf.:$..5"41R1F4 ;E;htll I 3i,t aft t' tettrociirn itais lto11111 114M4 RFF.111FNc cARPor TPANISJTIC*S., rolai tetcps1PitsieJs 12 :1 ictCtil - 1 c',1 7 31 k* 4 - .800 CA „T tmeifig SHEET CARET146 frosts71 ns , ssssS S71 kk"4 rsi4 =SirICS '30 !ILI rLO:'4 2rxe C.ARiti 1 211 CC or Malettolt 1 CA: It* 'eSEESS ceivirPT 7 f t`st" 2cett 11L11141C 44C 1 strrss 441 J nit Tete ertte Fitibe Act tetta ICC ea We agree to do the above estimated work for the price of $1290 ikjik,„,: '"1L k N11/4 I: ffl - 77u Bid Proposal DATE: 12, 20.'i TO: Tii,„)iti Pint!' FROM: RI M spar (10 6r1 pticricr. 651 3324 FT (72).1 Ea:50 PROJECT L i SECTIONS: 1 C fi BASE BID: Tolve up anti ucrn thnU t 110111 me ler) kt the stairs cciiintinpiiiiiiQ f4tarres Eurnisn ar-472rstall ciat irlistP-14171 aliciwancel in4 botiiritli MIFIA1It W IQ Penormectiat t5t 004 oti ALTERNATE, Ri rfterilgief: c arid base at trier leading to Confers R001024 ADD S2 272 00 ALTERNATE 42 Hf!plarie treads and risers from lower Levci to 2 flool = ADO 53 011 00 BRtkiS Exideal as included adirive dridng dean ai to lecielve finishes Corrected oi excess moisture nit wiling earrootirid part 311. drcesiz r an will rilerlere wrlin draper inrIzIdeti Ptrxezy..s0' or isodeeptable to St Rai. itokiintii C:aii:deit i().1 yOttt consittieration, oepied by r 11i tolnaddaddipathadt&com INH( X kipssage rage I or 1 From tolurityr Ailq>ipsuittiwikc ubject: Co4solia ,meirts 1 fl ,111 Oatr Tua JJ 2011 -05LY: ctorr4e6Rbuiders.corry Torn, Attached pease lotto my proo8sal np,t in my otict,,ttg am: Work al night hzecyrng of tne existing crpe i wwi; act go g7,10 a landf1111 Aii roeczt2xisary sunittri items for .a kt:ontriletia quality jnb thank you D !DJ) Murzall Vide Pimp lad( St Paid LInciaprn & Carpet Ca 651 88777C ILI Arun ',1111f (4.7 larsanac,net 1 7 3 1„ Nuti.BK l'..:tziet9911,..i th82Se8INIesmtuc .. Pox— 2,)1)- 2 Ma A � i. TM a .,-. Document G7OITM - 2001 Change Order PROJECT (Name and address): CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: 002 OWNER: El Columbia Heights Office Remodeling & DATE: June 27, 2011 ARCHITECT: [1] Security Improvements City of Columbia Heights CONTRACTOR: El 590 40th Avenue NE FIELD: ❑ Columbia Heights, MN 55421 TO CONTRACTOR (Name and address): ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: OTHER: ❑ EDS Builders, Inc. CONTRACT DATE: 404A Saint Croix Trail North CONTRACT FOR: Lakeland, MN 55043 THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (Include, where applicable, any undisputed amount attributable to previously executed Construction Change Directives) Repair existing opening in Finance Department/Apparatus Bay Window Add two 3" x 3" angle iron, soap above the block above west window in Finance Dept, saw cut and mortar mix Add $ 453.00 Paint to match existing Add $ 230.00 Add Ceiling support in Office Add $1,197.00 Bullet Resistant Glass Speak Thrus TSS -Mk1 Talk Thru Add $ 874.00 Supply and install breakmetal trim. Add $ 207.00 Total Change Order Add $2,961.00 The original Contract Sum was $ 77,980.00 The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ - 753.00 The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was $ 77,227.00 The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of $ 2,961.00 The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be $ 80,188.00 The Contract Time will be increased by Zero (0) days. The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is NOTE: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive. NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER. City of Columbia Heights EDS Builders, Inc. City of Columbia Heights ARGI-F-EeT name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name) Building Official 404A Saint Croix Trail North, 590 40th Avenue NE, Columbia 590 40th Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, Lakeland, MN 55043 Heights, MN 55421 MN 55421 ADD ESS ADDRESS AD RE „ / � (Signature) BY (Signatu) BY (Signature) , Lawrence R. Pepin Earl Doc Smith Walter Fehst (Typed name) (Typed name) (Typed n e) DAT DATE DA AIA Document G701 TM - 2001. Copyright © 1979, 1987, 2000 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. YARNING: This A!A "' Document is protected by U,S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AtA'' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 13:08:18 on 07/13/2011 under Order No.5846604474_1 which expires on 01/06/2012, and is not for resale. User Notes: (945176953) JUN/2972011/TEU 09:58 AM GAREIICK STEEL FAX No, 612 521 9;' P,062 steel f. as order No. 584ab 1900 North Second Street Juno 23, 2011 MinneaPolis, MN 55411 Phone; 622-521-8857 Fax: 812-521-9553 4:59137M4 Page 1 of 1 Bill To: Ship To GARELICX PRZFERRED CUSTOMERS GARELICK PREFERRED CUSTOMERS Attn: Phone: Customer PO#: . F.O.B.: Origin Ship Via: Will Call Terms: COD Order Date: 05/19/2011 Due Date: 05/19/2011 Sale. : WES Sales2: G14 LIZ Quote*: 519201104 Order Qty UM Description Width Length Weight Price um Total 2 ANGI.E 3 X 3 X 1/4 10' 0" 99 40.50 $81.00 Total. Weight 58 Subtotal Non taxable $0.00 Subtotal taxable $81,00 MM: 7.78% $8.30 LailloADING INSTXUCTIONS: : $0.00 Receiving Hours: Total $87.30 Max Bundle Weight: 0 MESSAQES: /3 /D Spacers: /5 % . • • \ .0 ,.\11 . , . . . . . Wd OS:OT TT -2T --Inc . .„ „ • , •aik4 • • •,•• 3 • All Phase Companies, Inc. 404-A St, Croix Trail North, Lakeland, MN 55043 Ph# 651-436-2930 Pax #651-436-3918 t: • ' June 6, 2011 Mr. Earl (Doc) Smith EDS Consultants and Construction Managers 404-A St. Croix Trail North Lakeland, MN 55043 Re: Preparation and installation of concrete block Columbia Heights City Hall — 590 40 Avenue N.E., Columbia Heights, MN INVOICE 1337 Kelly 8:00 to 4:30 8 'A hours @, $75/hour 637.50 35 block and soaps and mortar 95,00 Chop saw and blade 100,00, TOTAL $ 832,50 • • Please pay to: AllPhase Companies, Incorporated 404-A St. Croix Trail North Lakeland, MN 55043 eJ1( • \P'( 1,0q1 \ k a I . J ‘.1 a . OD 14 k i)1( ro DUE UPON RECEIPT 1.5% INTEREST PER MONTH AFTER 30 DAYS • THANK YOU MR USING ALLPHASE COMPANIES, INCORPORATED • •. .,-• 0 20'd Nd Tg:OT TT-2t—inr Invoice . Avalon Building and Remodeling Inc. Date invoice # License # 20626978 6/20/2011 Ea 3123 James Ave South Mpls, MN 55408 Phone # 651-325-6704 BILL TO PROJECT ADDRESS: Fns Item Quantity Description Rate Amount Labor Removal of block WEST wall and insertion of 40.00 200.00 irons; cleanup Total $200.00 Phone # Fax # /5- 651-325-6704 612-822-8724 9 0 ' d kld OT T -‘,.. ‹ • , 404A Saint Croix Trail North - Lakeland, MN 55043 • Phone: 651-436-2426 _ Fax: 651-436-3918 • ernaikinfo@edsbuilders.com - www.edsbuilders.com 1 Invoice No. I NVOICE Customer Misc Name City of Columbia Heights Date 6/27/2011 Address 590 40th Avenue NE Order No. City Columbia Heights State MN ZIP 55421 Rep Phone FOB . C RY I Description 1 Unit Price I 1 , TOTAL 1 !CITY HALL OFFICE REMODEL AND SECURITY UPGRADES I , Ceiling Support for New Office , 1 Twelve 2 x 8's j $ 99.00 ; $ 99.00 1 Hardware $ 61.75 I $ 61.75 8 Hours labor $ 70.00 I $ 560.00 8 Hours labor 1 $ 40.00 I $ 320.00 1 O&P 15% $ 167.25 1 $ 156.11 SubTotal $ 1,196.86 Shipping . _ . Payment Check Tax Rate(s) Comments TOTAL 1 $ 1,196.86 Name CC # 'Office Use Only Expires 1 I 1 , Payment is due within twenty (20) days of our invoice date. Interest of 1.5% will be charged per month on delinquent accounts. If payment is not received when due, EDS may take any steps necessary to enforce its rights under this agreement. Customer agrees to pay all costs incurred in collection with any delinquent account, including attorney's fees whether a lawsuit is commenced or not. EDS is notifying you that we could place a lien on the property if payment is not received in a timely fashion. Thank you for your business! , ,.... _ D IN H A4 \ G A S 11\ Co ''''' ■-;:* +. ' 1 -, * ft Tol OI- C. a 1 From Eric Soliand, (715) 4S3-= ,=19 ext. 15 F t 5 . / 1 06 - 3 Pw: 1 — . . 0 U . ot 0 For Roo 0 - • Com t 0 Pi - • Reply 0 M ... — - • Co et; p n (e -C (MK 1 5f,e..tx 12 wk./ To+AI 5 iL..../ e (.11'1 I ...C h 7 4 d f 3 80 eA41., e 4-14- I - rti—bc Hudson New Richmond St. Croix Fails 2001 Rook St. 130 East First Street 941 Washington Strart No 1-000-286-1622 1-880 -24S-4448 14004724424 Phone (7le) 305- Phone: (710 240-4440 Phone: (71)4$4454 Fax C71)385614 raw (715)243c Pax; (710 483-6404 1 Auto >' Home > Business www.indlenheadglass.com 1 ' cl Xid. ird3Stri1 dH HdBB:2I 'TOE SO Inr Wd IG:OT TT —2T - tet'd doc@edsconsultants.com Message Page 1 of 1 From: "Eric"^oaoland@indhanhoadg|aoo.com> /@ Subject: Columbia Hts Break . oN Date: Tua.12 Jul 2O11 16:38:38 -0500 To: "'Doc Smith'" Hi Doc We propose to furnish and install break metal trim as discussed with technicians for $180. `/ // y/ 1L-4„ ("0, , Thank you, �� f� �h �~`~ /' `"�/ EhoGoUand Manager, Indianhead Glass 715-483-9919 ext 15 Direct 8UO-472-G424 Toll Free vmmm.indionheadg!ass.00m • http://mail.usmac.net/Session/1129-02oCjJR3F21N1TFjjG6v/Message.wssp?Mailbox—INB... 7/13/2011 ZoUU Z379- '''%-‘,..EATA Document G7OITM - 2001 Change Order PROJECT (Name and address): CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: 004 Revised OWNER: ►� Columbia Heights Office Remodeling & DATE: September 13, 2011 ARCHITECT: ❑ Security Improvements City of Columbia Heights CONTRACTOR: El 590 40th Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 FIELD: [l] TO CONTRACTOR (Name and address): ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: OTHER: ❑ EDS Builders, Inc. CONTRACT DATE: 404A Saint Croix Trail North CONTRACT FOR: General Construction Lakeland, MN 55043 THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (Include, where applicable, any undisputed amount attributable to previously executed Construction Change Directives) Extra labor and material due to covered J- boxes, refeed and demo, relocate time clock, refasten existing raceways, clean up panel wiring. Add $2,136.70 Lighting materials in upper corridor. Add $ 266.80 Credit for not moving annunciation panel. Delete -($ 250.00) Total Change Order Add $2,153.50 The original Contract Sum was $ 77,980.00 The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ 13,783.90 The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was $ 91,763.90 The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of $ 2,153.50 The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be $ 93,917.40 The Contract Time will be increased by Zero (0) days. The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is NOTE: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive. NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER. City of Columbia Heights EDS Builders, Inc. City of Columbia Heights ARCHITECT (Firm name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name) Building Official 404A Saint Croix Trail North, 590 40th Avenue NE, Columbia 590 40th Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, Lakeland, MN 55043 Heights, MN 55421 MN 55421 0 ADDRESS ADpIRESS n ADDRESS pyre, / irnature) L BY (Signature) BY (Signature) Larry Pepin Earl Doc Smith Walter Fehst (Typed name) (Typed name) (Typed name) 1' / / (C September 13, 2011 f 2 4 p' It DAT iii DATE DATE AIA Document G701 TM - 2001. Copyright © 1979, 1987, 2000 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AiA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document, or any j portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12•02:44 on 09/13/2011 under Order No.5846604474_1 which expires on 01/06/2012, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1681347175) 6 ••• LA." v • - S) 1' DOC TH Vhe71 c4 ?At E '7 rr OrY14 WO al n Jaileifi Pleloe e /9-r-ift kst.toithd r Pghete, fie pc a.,55* J/ 50?oevdeold LA)ase-i LIJAV C1/61 CM LA-bolt tcp 01,0 V b T11 Aec- CR - 40 P.figt61.44.._ / /1 ch31.1 wec, 4 ri g ftou g3 d _e 14f RS 4totk 514,4e1T-4,. ' 3. - 4 - 6 t(iXLIt.„ o 1 ‘ ( 1.A (411 LA-lex- cavz_. 0u-T510E. vArC, UtA-3 Y? p2:T tem tot zE) Cs ( e eg„0,0034t. , srogR tda CIS Trr- 4--3 NV 1.A.o (Ameme,-- -* ?5 - ,7) A C 71109- C. , artit- Ed WUS2:0T TI OE 9T .611 682.9-t 'ON XdA OINI3D13 dOISMOHS: NONA Proposal •^11 +7. • + del 16481 Flintwood St NW Andover, MN 55304 Phone 763 434 -7792 Fax 763 434 -6789 Proposal Submitted To: Job Name and Location: Ci of Columbia Jei, hts EDS Office Remodel & Seeuiri Im roveinert!.ts Phone: 651 Fax: 651-436-3918 Date: 3/22/11 We hereb ro ose to furnish materials and labor necessa for the coat- letion of: ►, Remodel upper bathroom and hall wall with exit/emergency light , 'Wire Card readers for 8 doors with separate cable runs with $100 allowance for equipment. Adaptable main control for additional openings. Hardware and frame cutting by others. Qty of 2 - 4" chases (20' runs). Qty of 1 -2" chase (20' rnn ). Exit/Emergency light by stairwell corridor. t Y Fire alarm annunciation panel relocation with termination by others. (kb 71-45 Cover for J -box to L J 1/00:41›c 0.A/C Demo and temp construction lighting. Interior space wiring per plan. -Reinstall 6 -18 cell parabolic fixtures with new lamps, whips, openings. - Furnish and install 6 new 18 cell parabolic fixtures with lamps and openings. -14 data/voice J -boxes with 1/4" stub. -3 separate furniture partition J' -boxes for future with home run. - 4 - 3 way switches. - duplex receptacles on % walls. -14- quad receptacles. - ExitlEmergency LED above doorway. 0 wiring allowance for grade mount controls and equipment by others. $375 la -Electric Permit Fee and miscellaneous. WE P ROPOSSE hereby to furnish material and labor- complete in accordance with above specifications not to exceed: Pay r nertt to be .made: Upon. Completion All material is uaranteed to be as specified, The contract p g p price for this construction project has been calcutatrd based on the current prices for the component building materials. However, the market for the building materials are considered to be volatile and sudden price increases could occur. Shortstop Electric agrees to use their besii efforts to obtain the lowest possible prices from available building material suppliers, but should there be an increase in the prices of these specified materials that am purchased after execution of contract for use in this construction project, the Owner agrees to pay that cost increase to the Electrical Contractor, Any claim by the Eicctri a! Contractor for payment of a cost increase, as provided above, shall require written notice delivered by the Electrical Contractor to the owner swin th increased cost, building material or materials in question, and the source of supply, supported by invoices or bills of sale. All work to be completed in a substantial workmanlike manner according to specifications submitted, per standard practices. Any Aeration or deviation from above specifications involving extra costs wlll be executed only upon written orders or verbal job site authori7atioa, and will become an extra charge over and above the estimate_ All agreements contingent upon strikes, accidents or delay beyond our control. Owner to carry fire, tornado and other necessary insurance. Our workers are fully covered by Workmen's Compensation Insurance. Authorized Signature Note: This proposal my he withdrawn if not accepted within 45 days. _ P. e 1 of 1 Acceptance of Proposal. The above prices, specifications and conditions are satisfactory and are hereby accepted. You are authoriLed to do the work as specific4 Payment will be made as outlined above, Signature Signature Date of Acceptance .. INVOICES NO1 PAID WITHIN 30 DAYS ARE SUBJECT TO SERVICE CHARGES OF 1.3 %PER MONTH OR 18% PER YEAR_ tid WdSS : OI T IOZ 91 '611U 68L9- 17217 -29L : ON Xdd D I J19d - l3 dOIS1JONS : NOJJ 1 � / invoice - � 4.017 '' Or''* ` Mei Date Invoice # 8/4/11 C -3656 16481 Flintwood St NW Job Site and Job Description Andover, MN 55304 590 40th Ave NE Columbia Heights Phone 763 -434 -7792 Fax 763 - 434 -6789 Remodel old Fire Dept offices at shortstopelectriccontcasinet City Hall. Bill To EDS 1821 University Ave S. Suite 204 St Paul, MN 55104 Terms Service Date Due on receipt 3/29/11- 7/20/11 Item Description Qty Amount Quote Office remodel and security improvements Quote 9,920.00 price for Permit/Labor/Materials Extra Extra labor and material due to covered 3- boxes L.i„- 1,858 00 refeed and demo. Relocate time clock. Refasten existing raceways. Clean up panel wiring. , ,J 22 hours licensed labor= $1,540 plus $318 materials (wire, greenfield, wire nuts, misc) Extra Add wall lights in upper corridor. 4 hours licensed ;o 512.00 labor on 7/7/11= $280 plus $232 materials (MC cable, pipe, wire, fixtures, nipple, misc Extra HVAC allowance er quote - Actual labor 5.50= $385 plus 102lmaterials (pipe, wire, disconnect, breaker, misc)= $487 -5 1 ,71 I „ c 16 4 ,--=7") 6 s; We appreciate your business! Invoices not paid within 30 days subject to a 1.50% service charge. Balance Due $12,402:00 j. Le o 2 372_ ItAIA Document G7OITM — 2001 Change Order PROJECT (Name and address): CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: 006 OWNER: 14, Columbia Heights Office Remodeling & DATE: November 11, 2011 ARCHITECT: Security Improvements City of Columbia Heights CONTRACTOR: 590 40th Avenue NE E] Columbia Heights, MN 55421 FIELD: TO CONTRACTOR (Name and address): ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: OTHER: EDS Builders, Inc. CONTRACT DATE: 404A Saint Croix Trail North CONTRACT FOR: General Construction Lakeland, MN 55043 THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (Include, where applicable, any undisputed amount attributable to previously executed Construction Change Directives) Prime and paint one coat on walls, 1472 sf in old main finance office and small adjacent office, excluding wallpapered walls. Add $1,192.32 The original Contract Sum was 77,980.00 The net change by previously authorized Change Orders 15,937.40 The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was 93,917.40 The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of 1,192.32 The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be 95,109.72 The Contract Time will be unchanged by Zero (0) days. The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is NOTE: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive. NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER. City of Columbia Heights EDS Builders, Inc. City of Columbia Heights name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name) Building Official 404A Saint Croix Trail North, 590 40th Avenue NE, Columbia 590 40th Avenue NE Lakeland, MN 55043 Heights, MN 55421 Columbia Heights, MN 55421 ADDRESS ADDRESS ("--\ ADDRESS z--- BY (Signature) BY (Signature) BY (Signature) Larry Pepin Earl Doc Smith Walter Fehst (7'yped name) (Typed name) (Typed name) lliz 2- 2oll II /if / ,^) DAT DATE DATE AIA Document G701 — 2001. Copyright 1979, 1987, 2000 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This Ale Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any 1 portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:16.51 on 11/11/2011 under Order No.5846604474_1 which expires on 01/06/2012, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1969581913) General Conditions General Type: General Requirements Level: Other Note: Unit Qty Unit Description Notes 2.00 HR Final Clean Up Painting & Finishing General Type: General Requirements Level: Other Note: Unit Qty Unit Description Notes 1472.00 SF Prime & 1 Coat of Latex Paint on all Walls Paint walls in old main finance office & small adjacent office. REMOVEL OF WALLPAPER ON SOUTH WALL NOT INCLUDED Subtotal: 1,036.80 Taxes: 0.00 Grand Total: $1,036.80 Signature Date /03,(&F,C, Signature Date Signature Date Job: Initials: / Pages: 2 of 3 Avalon Building & Remodeling Inc. Job Number: JOB000010 License #:205883920 Job Name: Columbia Heights service Building Address: Client: finance office 2nd floor, Old 3123 James Ave So. Site Address: Mips, MN, 55408 590 40th Ave NE Phone: 6513256704 Columbia Heights, MN, 55421 Job Contacts Sales Person: Ray Miller Mobile: 651-325-6704 Email: rayjmiller@usfamily.net Project Manager: Erron Lewis Mobile: 612-770-4759